JP7284018B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine capable of executing games.

In a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, there has been proposed a technique for displaying character information of characters' lines in different modes during execution of a super ready-to-win effect (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2016-77592 A

According to the technique described in Patent Document 1, when displaying a moving image to which a character image is added, the control load for displaying the moving image increases, or recognition of the character image becomes difficult. Inconvenience may occur in display control.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that enables appropriate display control.

(A) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
advance notice effect executing means (Fig. 9-11) capable of displaying multiple types of notice effect with different degrees of advantage;
a notification effect execution means (FIGS. 9-11) capable of informing which of the advance notice effects has been selected;
an effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image to which a character image is added;
a first storage area for storing data related to moving images;
a second storage area for storing data relating to character images;
moving image control means for controlling display of a moving image using data in the first storage area;
character image control means for controlling display of a character image using data in the second storage area, wherein the data in the second storage area is a plurality of characters including a first component and a second component; containing data about image components,
The character image control means is
During the display period of the character image added to one moving image, the first component and the second component can be changed,
The first component and the second component related to the character image can be individually changed and displayed,
The effect executing means is capable of executing, as the specific effect, a first specific effect corresponding to the case of being controlled to the advantageous state and a second specific effect corresponding to the case not being controlled to the advantageous state,
The moving image control means is capable of controlling display of moving images using different data in the first storage area for the first specific effect and the second specific effect,
a character image data table composed of data relating to a plurality of character image constituent elements in the second storage area;
The character image data table that can be used when executing the first specific effect includes a first character image data table and a second character image data table different from the first character image data table,
The character image data table that can be used when executing the second specific effect includes the first character image data table and the second character image data table,
The degree of expectation that the advantageous state is controlled when the character image is displayed using the second character image data table, rather than when the character image is displayed using the first character image data table. is high,
The first character image data table includes first data for displaying the first character image using a first component made up of first character information and a second component made up of first display setting information; and second data for displaying the second character image using a first component configured by the second character information and a second component configured by the second display setting information,
The second character image data table displays the third character image using the first data, the first element composed of the third character information, and the second element composed of the third display setting information. a third data to
It is characterized by
(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to another aspect performs a variable display and is controllable to an advantageous state (eg, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player (eg, pachinko gaming machine 1). etc.), and is capable of executing a specific effect (for example, reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B, etc.) for displaying a moving image to which a character image is added (for example, effect control microprocessor 91AK100, etc.) , a first storage area (for example, storage area 91AKM11) for storing data relating to moving images, a second storage area (for example, storage area 91AKM13) for storing data relating to character images, and data in the first storage area. video image control means (for example, video decoder 91AK143, video image renderer 91AK144, etc.) for controlling the display of a video image using the data in the second storage area; and character image control means (for example, a video decoder 91AK143, a text image renderer 91AK146, etc.), and the data in the second storage area includes a first component (for example, a text image specified by text image specification information) and a second component (for example, a text display style set by display setting information, etc.), and the character image control means controls, during the display period of the character image added to one moving image, the first configuration The element and the second component can be changed (see, for example, FIG. 10-7), and using information common to the specific image different from the character image (for example, field data constituting the color field), the character The second component related to the image can be changed (see, for example, FIG. 10-6), and detection means (for example, stick controller 31A, controller sensor unit 35A, etc.) capable of detecting the action of the player, and variable display Specific display means (for example, active display area 87AKA1, first reserved display area 87AKB1, second reserved display area 87AKB2, etc.) capable of displaying corresponding specific displays, and promotional effects capable of executing promotional effects for promoting actions of the player. Execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing step 87AKS051 of effect processing during variable display) and action effect execution means (for example, effect process during variable display) capable of executing action effect based on the detection result of the detection means Effect control CPU 120 for executing step 87AKS053, etc.) and predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect during execution of variable display (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing step 87AKS049 of effect processing during variable display, etc.) The specific display means displays the specific display in one of a plurality of display modes (for example, display colors corresponding to the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4) including a specific mode (for example, red display using the display image 87AKC4). can be displayed, and the promotion effect execution means has a plurality of effect modes including a special mode (for example, a large V-con display using the display image 87AKF3) (for example, the size of the V-con display according to the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 etc.), and the predetermined effect execution means can execute the promotion effect by any one of the above, and the predetermined effect execution means can perform a predetermined mode (for example, using the display image 87AKE3, "Gekiatsu! ! , etc.) (for example, messages corresponding to the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3). , the predetermined effect is executed in the predetermined mode (see, for example, the cut-in effect determination example 87AK41 in FIGS. 11-12), and the promotion effect is performed in the special mode at a different rate according to the effect mode of the predetermined effect. is executed (for example, refer to the decision example 87AK51 of the promotion effect corresponding to the cut-in effect in FIGS. 11-13), and is controlled to the advantageous state at different ratios according to the effect mode of the promotion effect (for example, FIG. 11- 13 (see example 87AK51 of determination of the promotion effect according to the variable display result in 13).
Such a configuration enables appropriate display control. Also, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, when the character image control means displays a character image corresponding to a common first component during the display period, the second component related to the character image is displayed. It may be changeable (see eg Figure 10-8).
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, the character image control means displays a specific character image (for example, a text image indicating "hot") corresponding to a specific first component group. It is possible, and the second component related to the specific character image may be changeable at a plurality of timings (see FIG. 10-8, for example).
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above, the character image control means can individually change and display the first component and the second component related to the character image. (see, eg, FIG. 10-4).
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

(5) In any one of (1) to (4) above, the data in the second storage area may include outline data (such as outline font data) that can be used to display character images.
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

(6) Glossy characters when a specific element is set as a character image constituent element in any one of the above (1) to (5) (for example, when the color field is "gold") In addition to displaying the image, it may be possible to add an effect image around the character image and display it (see, for example, FIG. 10-8).
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

(7) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (6) above, when a special element is set as a character image component (for example, when the color field is "rainbow"), a predetermined range (for example, a character It is possible to display character images in which multiple display colors are changed sequentially (for example, red, orange, yellow, green, water, blue, bluish purple, reddish purple, etc.) according to the internal coordinates, display time range, etc.). may
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include inventions related to gaming machines of the following (8) to (15). Conventionally, in a gaming machine, when a player operates a button during an operation valid period, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-164504, the degree of expectation of a big hit has been changed according to the mode of display and production. I had something to do. In such a gaming machine, the degree of expectation for a big win only differs depending on the mode of display and presentation when operated by the player, and it is difficult to appropriately raise the expectation of the player through presentation. In view of this point, it is desired to provide a gaming machine that appropriately heightens the player's sense of expectation through presentation and enhances the amusement of the game.

The gaming machine (8) is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player. Detectable detection means (for example, stick controller 31A, controller sensor unit 35A, etc.) and specific display means (for example, active display area 87AKA1, first reserved display area 87AKB1, second reserved display area 87AKB1, second reserved display area 87AKB2, etc.), acceleration effect execution means capable of executing an acceleration effect that promotes the action of the player (for example, effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS051 of effect processing during variable display), and detection of the detection means Action effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing step 87AKS053 of effect processing during variable display) capable of executing action effect based on the result, and predetermined effect execution capable of executing a predetermined effect during execution of variable display means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing step 87AKS049 of effect processing during variable display), and the specific display means has a plurality of display modes including a specific mode (for example, red display using display image 87AKC4) (For example, display colors corresponding to the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4, etc.) can display the specific display, and the promotion effect execution means can display a special mode (for example, a large V-con display using the display image 87AKF3, etc.) ) (for example, the size of the V-con display corresponding to the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3). using the image 87AKE3, such as a message of "hot!" Depending on the display mode of the display, the predetermined effect is executed in the predetermined mode at a different rate (see, for example, cut-in effect determination example 87AK41 in FIGS. 11-12), and depending on the effect mode of the predetermined effect, The promotion effect is executed according to the special mode at a ratio (see, for example, decision example 87AK51 of the promotion effect corresponding to the cut-in effect in FIGS. 11 to 13), and the advantageous effect is given at a different rate according to the effect mode of the promotion effect. (See, for example, determination example 87AK51 of promotion effect according to variable display results in FIGS. 11-13).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately heighten the player's sense of anticipation through the presentation, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(9) In the gaming machine of (8) above, after the specific display is displayed by the specific display means and before the action effect is executed by the action effect execution means, the predetermined effect is performed by the predetermined effect execution means. (see, for example, FIG. 11-9 (B3)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately heighten the player's sense of anticipation through the presentation, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(10) In the gaming machine of (8) or (9) above, in response to the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, during the cut-in effect at the second timing in FIG. 11-9 (B3)), the specific display It may be possible to change the display mode.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately heighten the player's sense of anticipation through the presentation, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (8) to (10) above, the display image 87AKE1 may to 87 AKE3), it may be possible to change the display mode of the specific display at different rates.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately heighten the player's sense of anticipation through the presentation, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (8) to (11) above, before execution of the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect executing means, corresponding to the case where the display mode of the specific display is the specific mode (For example, when the first timing is determined to be the variation pattern 87AKP1-3 in the determination example 87AK22 of the variation pattern), it is not necessary to change the display mode of the specific display.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately heighten the player's sense of anticipation through the presentation, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (8) to (12) above, setting means (for example, FIG. 8-6 and the CPU 103 for executing the set value change process of step S6A in step S6A), and the specific display may be displayed in one of a plurality of display modes at different ratios according to the setting of the setting means.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately heighten the player's sense of anticipation through the presentation, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(14) In the gaming machine according to any one of (8) to (13) above, setting means (for example, FIG. 8-6 such as the CPU 103 that executes the set value changing process of step S6A in step S6A), and the predetermined effect may be executed in one of a plurality of effect modes at different ratios according to the setting of the setting means.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately heighten the player's sense of anticipation through the presentation, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(15) In the gaming machine according to any one of (8) to (14) above, setting means (for example, FIG. 8-6 CPU 103 etc. that executes the set value change process of step S6A in step S6A), and the promotion effect may be executed in one of a plurality of effect modes at different ratios according to the setting of the setting means (for example, FIG. 87AK61, etc.).
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately heighten the player's sense of anticipation through the presentation, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a figure which shows the numerical range corresponding to a 1st special figure. It is a figure which shows the numerical range corresponding to a 1st special figure. It is a figure which shows the numerical range corresponding to a 2nd special figure. It is a figure which shows the numerical range corresponding to a 2nd special figure. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing in game control main processing. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing related to the characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of operation effect determination processing related to a characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of determination of the presence or absence of an operation effect and the number of times for the characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of determining the number of setting suggestions related to a characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a setting suggestion pattern related to a characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of determination of a setting suggestion pattern related to a characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of determination of the number of times of value notification related to the characteristic part 60AK; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display effect processing related to a characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. It is a figure which shows the execution period and execution timing of various production|presentation based on characteristic part 60AK. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an execution example of an operation presentation related to a characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an execution example of an operation presentation related to a characteristic portion 60AK; It is a figure which shows the structural example of the production|presentation control board which concerns on characteristic part 91AK and 92AK. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a storage area related to characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of determination of moving image data and a text display process table relating to feature parts 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a text display process table related to characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK; It is a figure which shows the example of text display control based on characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the text display setting information based on characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a text display example related to characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a text display example related to characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a text display example related to characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK; It is a figure which shows the structural example of a screen display. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of a variation pattern determination. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an active display and an example of suggestive effects; It is a figure which shows the cut-in production example and the promotion production example. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of production decision processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of determination of a final display image; It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of a change pattern, etc. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of a change pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of determination regarding suggestion production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of cut-in production|presentation. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of determination of an promotion effect related to a characterizing portion 87AK; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of determination of an promotion effect related to a characteristic portion 88AK; It is a figure which shows the example of determination of the promotion production|presentation based on characteristic part 89AK. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of the promotion production|presentation used as a modification. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of effect processing during variable display; It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation execution. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation execution. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation execution. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation execution. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation execution.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

In addition, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning gate door is in the ON state, the big winning gate door opens the big winning gate, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big winning gate. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstructing nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, when a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol varies depending on the type of the big hit to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) is a "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of the ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. In addition, during the small-hit game state, some of the big-hit types (in the big-hit type of the big-hit game state in the same manner as the small-hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state) By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above functions of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Sound output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signal and lamp signal, etc.), and control of movable body 32 (supply of signal for operating movable body 32, etc.) are executed by effect control CPU 120. You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register setting, and setting to make the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that designates the backed up game state before the power failure, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that designates the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 detects that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. , the screen is displayed for notification. The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the starting prize, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of pending memories is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting a round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is a "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are finished, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is finished.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time since the big win opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of a round in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the number of executions reaches the upper limit execution number. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending production as a production operation for informing the end of the jackpot game state has passed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the effect operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, a CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure per waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during a small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the jackpot middle effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big win game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to "7" which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinguishing of the pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

In addition, the game can be executed not only by loading a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, it includes a ratio of "0%" for one and a ratio of "100%" or less than "100%" for the other.

(Description of features related to set values)
Characteristic portions relating to set values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below.

Although not shown, the main board 11 of the pachinko game machine 1 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1 while being accommodated in a board case configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. ing. Although not shown, the main board 11 also includes a lock switch for switching to a set value change state in which the set values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and a jackpot switch to be described later in the set value change state. A setting changeover switch that functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as winning probability (ball-out rate), etc., and an open sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame are provided. Incidentally, the setting value change state in the present embodiment is also a state in which the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the staff of the game arcade (setting value confirmation state).

Operation units such as the lock switch and the setting changeover switch, which can be operated by a staff member of the game arcade, are provided in the setting changeover body portion and housed together with the main board 11 in the board case. The lock switch and setting changeover switch are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case so that they can be operated without opening the substrate case.

A substrate case accommodating a lock switch and a setting changeover switch is provided on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁Therefore, it is extremely difficult or impossible to operate the lock switch and the setting changeover switch when the game machine frame is closed. . In addition, since the lock switch requires operation of a setting key possessed by a game hall attendant or the like, it can only be operated by an administrator who possesses the setting key. The lock switch is also a switch that can be switched between ON and OFF with a setting key. Although the door key and the setting key are separate keys in the present embodiment, they may be combined into one key.

A display monitor capable of displaying set values and base values is arranged in the substrate case. The display monitor is connected to the main board 11 and arranged on the upper part of the board case. That is, the display monitor is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the game machine frame is not opened, the front side when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the back side of the game board 2 with the game machine frame opened. This is the actual front and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加In this way, the display monitor is arranged in front when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the game machine frame opened. However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

The display monitor includes a first display section, a second display section, a third display section, and a fourth display section. The 1st to 4th display parts of the display monitor are each composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw the figure "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. . The first to fourth display sections of the display monitor are capable of lighting or blinking in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

As a predetermined position of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, a game information display section may be provided at the lower left position of the game area. In the game information display section, a round indicator, a right-handed lamp, a probability variable lamp, and a time-saving lamp are collectively arranged. The round indicator can display the number of rounds of the big win game and the type of the big win during the big win game. The right-handed lamp lights up in a game state in which a game ball is launched toward the right game area, such as a low-probability base state or a big-hit game state as a time-saving state. The variable probability lamp lights up when it is in the variable probability state. The time-saving lamp lights up when it is in the time-saving state. The round indicator consists of 5 segments (LEDs).

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. As for the setting value, 6, which is the largest value, is the most disadvantageous value for the game arcade side, and the smaller the set value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the more advantageous the game arcade side is. If the ball output rate changes according to the set value, for example, the probability of a big win may change depending on the set value, or the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change depending on the set value although the jackpot probability is constant. good too. In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

8-1(A) and 8-1(B) are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table. Of these, FIG. 8-1 (A) shows a configuration example of the first special figure display result determination table used when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when the figure is the second special figure. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which the hit determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for each set value is set to the variable display result of the special symbol (special symbol display result). is. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. The hit determination value in the display result determination table is also assigned to the special figure display result in the range of 0-65535. The display result determination table is not limited to using separate display result determination tables for the first special figure and the second special figure, and the display result determination common to the first special figure and the second special figure A table may be used.

When the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the hit judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the display result is 1020 to 1346. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". When the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probability variable state, the hit judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result, 1020 ~ Up to 1383 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". When the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1383. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

In each display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) are special figures of "jackpot" assigned to display results. As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) in which the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the determined probability (for example, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and 1/1 when the set value is 4). 240, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6), the probability of being determined when the special figure display result is set to "big win" and controlled to the big win game state is higher. (For example, 1/200 when the setting value is 1, 1/180 when the setting value is 2, 1/160 when the setting value is 3, 1/140 when the setting value is 4, and 1/140 when the setting value is 4. 1/120 for 5 and 1/100 for a set value of 6). Each display so that the probability of being determined to control to the jackpot game state is higher when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is in the probability variable state (high probability state) than when it is in the normal state or the time saving state. In the result determination table, the determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state.

Depending on each setting value, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state is different (for example, if the setting value is 1, the jackpot probability in the probability-variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state) is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the normal state or the time saving state The multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state for the jackpot probability is 1.625 times)), and the probability variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or time saving state at each setting value , may be set to a constant value (for example, 5 times).

In each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result will be "small hit" and controlled to the small hit game state will be the same value. A judgment value is assigned. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/200. On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure. Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the graphic display result determination table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/100.

Regardless of the set value, the special figure display result is not limited to the form in which the probability of being determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the same probability, and the special figure display result is displayed according to the set value. The probability of being determined to control to the small winning game state as "small winning" may be varied. The special figure display result is not limited to a form with a different probability of being determined when controlling the special figure display result as a "small hit" according to the fluctuation special figure, and the special figure display result is " The probability that it is determined to control to the small hit game state as "small hit" may be the same probability.

FIGS. 8-2 to 8-5 show numerical ranges of hit determination values assigned to "big wins" and "minor wins" in each display result determination table. Of these, FIG. 8-2 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. FIG. 8-3 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state. FIG. 8-4 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. FIG. 8-5 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state.

As shown in FIG. 8-2, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively. Thus, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, if the set value is 1 While only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", if the set value is 2 or more, the numbers within the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are " assigned to the jackpot. The non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases. For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the range (1020 to 1346) of the big hit determination value, 32767 is set in the range of 32767 to 33094 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit determination value. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 8-3, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values determines the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively. Thus, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, if the set value is 1, the common numerical range Only numbers within (1020-1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, numbers within the range of the common number range plus the non-common number range will be the "jackpot" assigned. The non-common numerical range increases from 1347 as the set value increases. For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the variable probability state, the same as the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the range (1020 to 1674) of the big hit determination value, 32767 is set in the range of 32767 to 33094 as the reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value). This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 8-4, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively. In this way, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, if the set value is 1 While only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", if the set value is 2 or more, the numbers within the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are " assigned to the jackpot. The non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases. For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the big hit in the case of the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the range of determination values (1020 to 1346), 32767 is set in the range of 32767 to 33421 as a reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value). This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 8-5, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values determines the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively. In this way, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the game state is the variable probability state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, when the set value is 1, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the numbers within the range of the common numeric range plus the non-common numeric range are assigned to the "jackpot" It is The non-common numerical range increases from 1347 as the set value increases. For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the same as the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the big hit in the case of the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the judgment value range (1020 to 1674), 32767 is set in the range of 32767 to 33421 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and setting value, the judgment included in a continuous numerical range consisting of a common numerical range or a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range based on the hit judgment value of 1020 The value is set as the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and regardless of the game state and the set value, the judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 (common numerical range) based on the hit judgment value of 32767 is judged as the small hit. As a numerical range of values, a variable display result is determined.

In each display result determination table, if the variation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same) be. In addition, depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs (small value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure) The number of determination values included in the numerical range of the hit determination value is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is about 655. 2 times) On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

In each game state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is "big hit" and the big win game state is determined is the lowest, and the value of the set value is the lowest. Judgment values are assigned so that the larger the value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined to be controlled to the big hit game state as "big hit" (jackpot probability: setting value 6 > setting value 5 > setting value 4 > setting value 3 > set value 2 > set value 1). The CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and if the value of the random number MR1 matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the special symbol wins (big hit). It is determined to be A to big hit C). Also, when the random number MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small win, it is determined that the special symbol is a small win. In this way, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with the probability corresponding to the set value. "Probability" shown in FIG. 8-1 indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Also, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It is also to determine whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 are not limited to the configuration in which a total of six set values, ie, 1 to 6, are provided. Seven or more may be sufficient. The larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (increase in the probability of winning a big hit, making it easier to determine a specific type of big win, etc.). It may be arranged such that the smaller the set value set in the machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player.

While the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the game property itself is not limited to a form that does not change, but the game is played according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. The sex may change. For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a variable probability state based on passing through, the game ball has a different rate of passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game according to the variation special figure (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). A game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) that controls to a big hit game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the big win probability and small win probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). A common switch may be used for different purposes when game characteristics are changed according to a set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

Next, the processing within the game control main processing in the characterizing portion regarding the set value will be described. FIG. 8-6 is a flow chart showing an example of processing performed in the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. FIG. The processing in the game control main processing is, for example, in the game control main processing shown in FIG. ) and initial settings such as settings to make the RAM 102 accessible.

When processing within the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started while the clear switch is being operated. (Step S1A). Before the process of step S1A, the process of clearing the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear process has been executed according to a predetermined condition may be performed.

If the clear switch is ON (step S1A; Yes), the RAM clear flag is set (step S2A) and the process proceeds to step S3A; if the clear switch is OFF (step S1A; No), step S2A , the process proceeds to step S3A.

At step S3A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch is ON (step S3A). If the lock switch is ON (step S3A; Yes), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor is ON (step S4A). When the open sensor is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with the lock switch ON and the game machine frame opened (step S4A; Yes), is the RAM clear flag set? It is determined whether or not (step S5A).

When the RAM clear flag is set (step S5A), a set value change process (step S6A) for changing the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8A, If the RAM clear flag is not set (step A5A; No), set value confirmation processing (step S7A) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8A. move on. If the lock switch is OFF (step S3A; No) or the open sensor is OFF (step S4A; No), the process proceeds directly to step S8A.

The set value change process is performed by turning on the lock switch and the clear switch while the game machine frame is open when restarting the pachinko game machine 1 after turning it off. It is the process that takes place. In the setting value change process, a process of transmitting a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12, a process of updating the contents of the address F001 in the RAM 102 as a temporary setting value based on the operation of the setting changeover switch, According to the state of the lock switch, a process of updating and storing the provisional set value as an actual set value in the address F000 in the RAM 102 and a process of transmitting a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 are performed.

In the set value confirmation process, when the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted after being turned off (power off), the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on (clear switch is off) while the game machine frame is open. It is a process performed by In the setting value confirmation process, the process of transmitting a setting value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12, the display of the setting value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is started on the display monitor, and the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with A process of outputting a security signal to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall via a terminal board (not shown), and ending the display etc. according to the state of a lock switch, setting to the effect control board 12 A process of transmitting a value confirmation end notification command is performed.

It should be noted that in the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, from the start of each process, the lighting of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B and the round indicator, the first reservation indicator 25A, By starting the flashing of the second holding display 25B and the right-handed lamp, a player, a game hall staff member, or the like can see from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changing or setting the set value. It is sufficient if it is possible to recognize that the value is being confirmed. Further, the lighting pattern of the segments constituting the round indicator may be any lighting mode, especially as long as it is a mode that does not correspond to any of the plurality of jackpot types. Further, the segments forming the round indicator may be illuminated in different manners at the start of the set value change process and at the start of the set value confirmation process.

In step S8A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is to be cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time (RAM clear processing (step S9A) is to be executed). (step S8A). If the RAM clear flag is set (step S8A; Yes), the RAM clear process (step S9A) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S10A. If the RAM clear flag is not set (step S8A; No), the RAM is cleared. The process proceeds to step S10A without executing the process (step S9A). Then, as other processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started by a cold start or restored to the state before the power failure (started by a hot start) depending on whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, for example. ), perform the corresponding processing (step S10A), and terminate the processing within the game control main processing.

In the RAM clearing process, data other than the set values and the RAM clear flag are cleared by storing "00H" in addresses other than the first address (F000) where the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are stored. processing takes place. In the RAM clearing process, data other than the set values are not cleared, but when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, a predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F000 in the characteristic part 048AK of this embodiment) F003 and later of FXXX) may be cleared only.

The process of step S10A includes a process of blinking all the segments constituting the display monitor over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started. In addition, only some of the segments may be blinked, or at least some of all the segments forming the display monitor may be lit. Also, in the processing within the game control main processing, for example, based on the fact that an abnormal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (set value abnormal error), or that the power has been restored from a power failure during setting change, A process of transmitting an error designation command corresponding to the abnormality of the set value to the effect control board 12 may be included. Furthermore, the first display unit, second display unit, third display unit, and fourth display unit that constitute the display monitor are used to notify (error notification) that a set value abnormal error has occurred or that power has been restored from a power failure during setting change. A process of displaying "E." may be performed in each of the sections. In addition, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and manages the game hall through a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a computer, and thereafter, the CPU 103 displays until power failure occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off by the operation of a game hall clerk, etc.). The monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B may perform error occurrence notification.

In the processing within the game control main processing, after it is determined that the lock switch is ON in step S3A, when it is determined that the open sensor is OFF in step S4A, the opening of the gaming machine frame is detected. Since the operation of the lock switch is detected without being detected, an error designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 and an error notification may be performed by a display monitor or the like. The process of step S10A may include a process of transmitting a set value notification command to the effect control board 12. The setting value notification command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the process of step S10A regardless of whether the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed. As a result, on the side of the effect control board 12, when the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, regardless of whether or not the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, the set value can be stored in a identifiable manner. can.

When an abnormal set value is set or when the power is restored from a power failure during the change of the set value, the display monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B Notify the occurrence of an error. , the staff of the game hall or the like can recognize from both the front side and the rear side of the pachinko game machine 1 that an error has occurred or that the electricity has recovered from the power failure during the change of the setting value. . In addition, the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved by making it possible for the management device of the game hall to recognize the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 or the recovery from a power failure during the change of the set value. become.

As described above, the display result determination table provided in the pachinko game machine 1 has a hit determination value of 1020 to 1237, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, as shown in FIG. is set as a common numerical range for the jackpot determination value. If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 2 to 6 (if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 1), the value corresponding to each setting value from 1238 The range up to is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 2 to 6, the hit determination value of 1020 is used as the big hit reference value, and the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value are continuous. Since it is set to be a numerical value range, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, the value of the random number MR1 is from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical value range according to each setting value. It suffices to determine whether or not it is within the numerical range to . As a result, the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state can be reduced.

The numerical range of the jackpot determination value within the range of 0 to 65535 is set at one place with 1020 as the reference value, so compared to the case where multiple numerical ranges of the advantageous state determination value are provided, random It is not necessary to determine whether or not the numerical value MR1 is within the numerical range of the big-hit determination value (whether or not to control to the big-hit game state) multiple times. As a result, the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, in the display result determination table, regardless of whether the game state is normal state, time saving state, or variable probability state, the hit determination value 1020 is used as the big hit reference value, and the big hit determination Since the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of values are set to be continuous numerical ranges, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, the value of the random number MR1 is Whether it is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the normal state or the time saving state, and whether it is within the range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the probability variable state It is sufficient to judge no. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not the CPU 103 should control to the jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, in the display result determination table, the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value depending on whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure is different (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the first special figure display result judgment table is 328, whereas the small hit judgment value in the second special figure display result judgment table The number of determination values included in the numerical range is 655, which is about double). On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value). Therefore, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the small hit gaming state, the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special figure It suffices to determine whether or not Thereby, the CPU 103 can reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the small winning game state.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is set to the pachinko game machine 1 regardless of the set value set to the pachinko game machine 1. It is set to a numerical range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) that is different from the numerical range of the jackpot determination value in the case of 6. Therefore, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, it is determined whether or not the random number MR1 is within a numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to each set value. When it is determined whether or not to be controlled to the small hit game state, the random number MR1 is within the range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special figure. It is necessary to determine whether or not Thereby, the CPU 103 can reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the big hit game state and the processing load for determining whether to control to the small hit game state.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 60AK)
In the characteristic portion 60AK, the number-of-times notification effect is executed at a predetermined ratio during the execution of the variable display. In the number-of-times notification effect, the number of times the operation effect is executed is notified. The operation effects are effects in which various notices, notifications, and suggestions are made when the player's action such as pressing the push button 31B is detected. The operation performance of the characteristic part 60AK includes a notice performance for notifying that the game state will be controlled to the jackpot game state, a value notification performance for notifying whether or not the variable probability state will be controlled after the jackpot game state is ended, and a pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加A setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value in is included as an executable effect.

FIG. 9-1 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S171 of the effect control process processing as the variable display start setting processing regarding the characteristic portion 60AK. In the variable display start setting process, the final stop pattern and the like are determined (step 60AKS011). The final stop pattern is a fixed decorative pattern as a display result of variable display of decorative patterns, and is a variable pattern indicated by a variable pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 11 or a variable display result notification command. It can be determined based on variable display content, such as the display result of the display. A variation pattern specification command and a variable display result notification command are transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 based on the setting by the variation pattern setting processing of the special symbol process processing. The variable display contents corresponding to the display results of the variable pattern and variable display are "non-reach (losing)", "normal reach (losing)", "super reach (losing)", "non-probability (big hit)", "probability ( jackpot)" should be included. If the variable display content is any one of "non-reach (loss)", "normal reach (loss)", and "super reach (loss)", it is included when the display result of the variable display is "loss". If the variable display content is either "non-probability variation (big hit)" or "probability variation (big hit)", it is included when the display result of the variable display is "big hit". In addition, when the variable display content is "normal reach (loss)" and when the variable display content is "super reach (loss)", the variable display content is collectively referred to as "reach (loss)". When the variable display content is "non-probability variation (big hit)" and when the variable display content is "probability variation (big hit)", the variable display content is collectively called "big hit".

If the variable display content is "non-reach (losing)", the variable display state of the decorative pattern will not be in the ready-to-win state, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination will be stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display will be It becomes a "failure". When the variable display content is "ready (losing)", after the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win state, the determined decorative pattern of the ready-to-lose combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is "losing". becomes. Of the cases where the variable display content is "reach (losing)", if the variable display content is "normal reach (losing)", the reach effect with the "normal" fluctuation pattern is executed, and the variable display content is "super reach ( In the case of "losing)", a reach effect is executed according to the "super" variation pattern. When the variable display content is ``non-probability variation (big hit)'', the display result of the variable display is ``big hit'', and the jackpot type corresponds to ``non-probability variation'', and the game state after the jackpot game state is finished is shortened. state. When the variable display content is "variable probability (big hit)", the display result of the variable display is "big hit", and the game state after the end of the big win game state is the variable probability state corresponding to the "variable probability" of the jackpot type. Become. When the game state is a probability variable state, the probability that the display result of the variable display will be a "jackpot" increases, and it becomes easier to control the jackpot game state as an advantageous state, so that the game is played more than the normal state or the time saving state. A game value advantageous to the player is given.

The final stop pattern is determined so that when the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R have different (mismatched) decorative patterns. be. In this case, by extracting the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the left finalized symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like, and referring to the prepared left finalized symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, the determination is performed. Of the decorative symbols, the left finalized decorative design to be stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. Next, by extracting the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the right finalized symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like, and referring to the prepared right finalized symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, etc. Of the symbols, the right finalized decoration symbol to be stop-displayed in the "right" decoration symbol display area 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol is determined to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined decorative symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for medium-definite pattern determination updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like, and referring to a medium-definite pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, etc. Among the symbols, the medium-determined decoration symbols to be stopped and displayed in the "middle" decoration symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined.

The final stop pattern is determined to be the same (matching) decorative pattern in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R when the variable display content is "reach (loss)". be. In this case, by extracting the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the left/right determined pattern updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like, and referring to the prepared left/right determined pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, determination is performed. Among the decorative patterns, the decorative patterns having the same pattern number and displayed stopped together in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. Furthermore, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for medium-definite pattern determination updated by a random number circuit 124 or the like, and referring to a medium-definite pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, etc., a fixed decorative pattern Among them, the medium-determined decorative design to be stopped and displayed in the "medium" decorative design display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. Here, for example, when the pattern number of the middle fixed decorative pattern is the same as the pattern number of the left fixed decorative pattern and the right fixed decorative pattern, when the fixed decorative patterns become a big hit combination, an arbitrary value By adding or subtracting (for example, "1") to or from the symbol number of the middle determined decorative symbol, the determined decorative symbol may not be a jackpot combination but be a ready-to-win combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium fixed decorative pattern, the difference (design difference) between the pattern numbers of the left fixed decorative pattern and the right fixed decorative pattern may be determined, and the medium fixed decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern difference may be set. .

The final stop pattern is displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R when the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)". are determined to be the same (matching) decoration pattern. In this case, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the jackpot fixed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like is extracted. Subsequently, by referring to a table for determining a big hit fixed pattern prepared and stored in advance in the ROM 121, the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, The decorative symbols having the same symbol number to be stop-displayed together in 5C and 5R may be determined. At this time, the normal pattern (for example, even It suffices if it is determined which of the decorative symbols showing odd numbers) and the probability variable patterns (for example, the decorative symbols indicating odd numbers) should be determined as the fixed decorative symbols. In the promotion performance during the big win, after a combination of decorative symbols (non-variable big win combination) that reminds the player of the big win but not the variable probability state is once stopped and displayed on the image display device 5, the game is in the state of the big win or in the state of the big win game. It is an effect that informs whether or not it will be in a probability changing state at the end of.

As a specific example, when the variable display content is "non-probability variable (big hit)", a fixed decoration pattern is determined from among a plurality of types of normal symbols. Further, when it is determined that the variable display content is ``probability variation (big hit)'' and promotion performance during the big win is not executed, the fixed decoration pattern is determined from a plurality of types of probability variation patterns. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the promotion performance during the big win even if the variable display content is ``probability variable (big win)'', the fixed decoration pattern is decided from among a plurality of kinds of normal patterns. As a result, it is possible to prevent the promotion performance during the big win from being executed in spite of the derivation display of all the probability variable symbols as the fixed decoration symbols, so as not to give the player a sense of distrust.

When the variable display content is "non-probability variation (big hit)" or "probability variation (big hit)", in step 60AKS011, it is determined whether or not to execute a probability variation promotion effect such as a re-lottery effect or a promotion effect during a big hit. may be broken. In the re-lottery performance, it is once difficult or impossible to recognize that the decorative patterns of the non-probable variable jackpot combination consisting of the same normal patterns are once displayed during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and that control to the variable probability state is made, By variably displaying (re-varying) the decoration patterns again and stop-displaying the decoration patterns of the probability variable big hit combination consisting of the same probability variation patterns, the player can be recognizably informed that the probability variation state is controlled. In some cases, the decoration symbols of the non-probability variation big hit combination are stopped and displayed after the decoration symbols are changed again in the re-lottery production, so that the control to the probability variation state may not be notified. When it is determined in step 60AKS011 that the re-lottery effect is to be executed, the combination of decoration symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed may be determined before the execution of the re-lottery effect.

After determining the final stop symbol and the like, operation effect determination processing is executed (step 60AKS012). By the operation effect determination process, determination and setting for executing the operation effect and the number of times notification effect are performed. Then, one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance is determined as the effect control pattern (step 60AKS013). The production control pattern may include a special figure fluctuation time production control pattern, an operation production control pattern, other notice production control patterns, and the like. For example, corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern specification command, select one of the prepared special figure variation production control patterns and set it as a usage pattern. Also, one of a plurality of prepared operation effect control patterns may be selected and set as a usage pattern in accordance with the determination result of the operation effect determination process of step 60AKS012. In addition, it is not limited to setting a separate production control pattern as the special figure fluctuation time production control pattern and the operation production control pattern, but one production control pattern corresponding to the combination of execution setting of each production is set. There may be. When the production control pattern is determined, for example, corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, the initial value of the production control process timer provided in a predetermined area (production control timer setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 122 is set. (step 60AKS014). Also, the setting for starting the variation of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 is performed (step 60AKS015). At this time, by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the production control pattern (special figure fluctuation production control pattern) determined in step 60AKS013 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, etc. The variation of the decorative design may be started in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

Subsequently, the pending display update setting at the start of the variable display is set (step 60AKS016). For example, in the pending display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display portion (leftmost display portion) corresponding to the pending number “1” is erased (digested), and other pending numbers “2” to The pending display in the display portion corresponding to "8" is moved (shifted) one by one to the left. As a result, the pending display is shifted. In the active display section provided on the screen of the image display device 5, active display corresponding to the erased (extinguished) pending display in the pending display area may be performed. In addition, when the number of pending memories is "0", if the variable display is started immediately based on the occurrence of the first start winning or the second starting winning, the active display area will be displayed without updating the pending display. A setting may be made to update the active display in the . After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step 60AKS017), and then the variable display start setting process is terminated.

FIG. 9-2 is a flow chart showing an example of the operation effect determination process executed in step 60AKS012 of the variable display start setting process. In the operation effect determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the effect permission condition is established (step 60AKS021). The effect permission condition may be determined in advance as a condition under which execution of the operation effect is permitted. For example, when the ready-to-reach effect of SP ready-to-win which is super reach is executed according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specifying command, the effect permission condition may be established. Moreover, it is good also as one of the production|presentation permission conditions that it is a high probability high base state in a probability variable state. In this way, when the ready-to-win effect of the SP ready-to-win is executed in the high-probability/high-base state, the effect permission condition may be established.

In the characteristic portion 60AK, SP reach A and SP reach B are prepared in advance as reach effects of super reach. Each ready-to-win effect may include effects having different effects from each other. Each ready-to-win effect may include effects having a common effect mode. When the display result of the variable display is a "big hit", the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is higher than the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of normal-to-win. In addition, when the display result of the variable display is a "big hit", the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of SP ready-to-win B is higher than the ratio of executing to-win effect of SP ready-to-win A. When the display result of the variable display is “losing”, the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of normal reach is higher than the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win. Further, when the display result of the variable display is “losing”, the ratio of executing the ready-to-reach effect of SP reach-A becomes higher than the ratio of executing the ready-to-reach effect of SP reach-B. According to the execution ratio of such a reach production, among the reach productions of super reach such as SP reach A and SP reach B, the reach production of SP reach B was executed more than the case where the reach production of SP reach A was executed. In this case, the expectation of a big hit increases.

When the effect permission condition is not satisfied at step 60AKS021 (step 60AKS021; No), the operation effect determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the effect permission condition is satisfied (step 60AKS021; Yes), the presence or absence of the operation effect and the number of times are determined (step 60AKS022). The operation effect is executed according to whether or not it is to be executed, for example, by referring to an operation effect execution determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the operation effect execution. and the number of times of execution in the case of execution are determined. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining execution of the operation effect may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 . In step 60AKS022, the presence or absence and the number of operation effects are set to "no execution" in which no operation effect is executed, or "executed 5 times" in which the number of times the operation effect is executed is 5, and the number of times the operation effect is executed is 10 times. One of "10 executions" is determined.

Based on the determination result of step 60AKS022, it is determined whether or not it is determined to "not execute" that the operation effect is not executed (step 60AKS023). If it is determined that there is no execution (step 60AKS023; Yes), the operation effect determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no "execution" (step 60AKS023; No), it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display is "big hit" (step 60AKS024). If it is determined to be a "jackpot" (step 60AKS024; Yes), the setting suggestion number of times is determined (step 60AKS025). The number of times of setting suggestion indicates the number of times of operation effects executed as setting suggestion effects among the plurality of operation effects. In step 60AKS025, the setting suggestion frequency is determined by referring to a setting suggestion frequency determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion frequency. do it. Numerical data indicating the random number for determining the number of setting suggestions may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 . At step 60AKS025, the setting suggestion frequency is determined to be 0 when the jackpot type is "non-probability". When the jackpot type is "variable probability", it depends on whether the number of times of execution of the operation presentation is "five times" or "ten times" is ten times. Therefore, the number of setting suggestions is determined at different ratios.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step 60AKS025 is 0 (step 60AKS026). At this time, if the determination result is determined to be other than 0 (step 60AKS026; No), a suggested setting pattern is determined (step 60AKS027). The suggested setting pattern is determined by referring to a suggested setting pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the suggested setting pattern. Any setting suggestion pattern may be determined among a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. The numerical data indicating the random number value for setting suggestion pattern determination may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 .

When the determination result in step 60AKS025 is determined to be 0 (step 60AKS026; Yes), or after determining the suggested setting pattern in step 60AKS027, the number of times of value notification is determined (step 60AKS028). The number of times of value notification indicates the number of times of operation effects executed as value notification effects among a plurality of operation effects. In step 60AKS028, based on the numerical data indicating the random number for determining the number of times of value notification, the number of times of value notification is determined by referring to a table for determining the number of times of value notification, which is stored in advance and prepared in ROM 121. do it. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the number of times of notification of value may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 . In step 60AKS028, the value is calculated at a different rate depending on whether the number of times of execution of the operation effect is "5 times" or "10 times". The number of notifications is determined.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step 60AKS028 is 0 (step 60AKS029). At this time, if the determination result is determined to be other than 0 (step 60AKS029; No), the value notification pattern is determined (step 60AKS030). The value notification pattern is determined as one of a plurality of value notification patterns based on whether the jackpot type is ``non-probability variation'' or ``probability variation'' for each execution number of operation effects. It should be done.

When it is determined that the display result of the variable display is not "big hit" at step 60AKS024 (step 60AKS024; No), or when the determination result at step 60AKS028 is determined to be 0 (step 60AKS029; Yes), or After the value notification pattern is determined in step 60AKS030, the number of times of notice effects is set (step 60AKS031). The number of notice effects indicates the number of times of operation effects executed as notice effects among the plurality of operation effects. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "losing", the value notification effect and the setting suggestion effect are not executed, so the number of executions of the operation effect may be set as the number of advance notice effects. When the display result of the variable display is a "big hit", the remaining number of times after subtracting the setting suggestion number and the value notification number among the number of times of execution of the operation presentation may be set as the number of advance notice presentations. After step 60AKS031, after determining the notice effect pattern (step 60AKS032), the operation effect determination process is terminated. The notice effect pattern is determined by referring to a notice effect pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the notice effect pattern. Any one of the plurality of advance notice effect patterns may be determined. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the announcement effect pattern may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 .

FIG. 9-3 shows an example of whether or not there is an operation effect and the number of times determined by step 60AKS022 of the operation effect determination process. At step 60AKS022 of the operation effect determination process, the presence or absence of the operation effect and the number of times are determined, for example, at a rate corresponding to the content of the ready-to-win effect. The content of the reach effect is determined corresponding to the display result of the variable display and the variation pattern, and is "SP reach A (big hit)", "SP reach B (big hit)", "SP reach A (loss)", "SP reach". B (losing)" should be included. If the ready-to-win effect content is either "SP reach A (big win)" or "SP reach B (big win)", it is included when the display result of the variable display is "big win". If the ready-to-win effect content is either "SP reach A (losing)" or "SP reach B (losing)", it is included when the display result of the variable display is "losing". When the ready-to-win effect is either "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)" or "SP ready-to-win A (losing)", SP ready-to-win A ready-to-win effect is executed as a super ready-to-win ready-to-win effect. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is either "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)" or "SP ready-to-win B (losing)", the ready-to-win effect of SP ready-to-win B is executed as the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 9-3, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the number of times of execution of the operation presentation is five times at a higher rate than when the display result of the variable display is "loss". or "executed 10 times" is determined to be 10 times. For example, when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (losing)" or "SP reach B (losing)", the determination ratio of "no execution" for not executing the operation effect is 50/100. On the other hand, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (big win)" or "SP ready-to-win B (big win)", the determination ratio of "no execution" for not executing the operation effect is 20/100. Thus, when the operation performance is executed, the ratio of control to the big win game state as an advantageous state is increased compared to when the operation performance is not executed, and the degree of expectation for the big win is increased.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 9-3, when the ready-to-reach effect of SP reach-B is executed, the number of times of execution of the operation effect is set to 10 at a higher rate than when the ready-to-reach effect of SP reach-A is executed. It is decided to "execute 10 times". For example, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)", the determination ratio of "perform 10 times" is 40/100 when the number of times of executing the operation effect is 10 times. On the other hand, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", the determination ratio of "perform 10 times" is 60/100 when the number of times to execute the operation effect is 10 times. Further, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (losing)", the determination ratio of "perform 10 times" is 10/100 when the number of times of executing the operation effect is 10 times. On the other hand, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (losing)", the determination ratio of "perform 10 times" is 20/100 when the number of times of executing the operation effect is 10 times. Of the ready-to-win performances of super ready-to-win, when the ready-to-win performance of SP ready-to-reach B is executed than when to-win performance of SP ready-to-win A is executed, the degree of expectation for big win is higher. Therefore, when the number of executions of the operation performance is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, the ratio of execution of the ready-to-win performance of SP ready-to-win B, which has a higher expectation of big hit than the ready-to-win performance of SP to-win A, is increased. It effectively raises people's expectations. Further, as the number of executions of the operation presentation increases, the ratio of control to the big win game state as an advantageous state increases, and the degree of expectation for big win increases.

FIG. 9-4 shows an example of setting suggestion count determination in step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process. Among them, FIG. 9-4(A) shows an example of determining the setting suggestion number in the case of "five times execution" in which the number of times of execution of the operation effect is five. FIG. 9-4(B) shows an example of determining the setting suggestion number in the case of "10 executions" in which the number of executions of the operation effect is ten. At step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process, the setting suggestion number is determined at a rate corresponding to the number of times the operation effect is executed and the jackpot type. The jackpot types include ``non-probability variable'' when not controlled to the probability variable state and ``probability variable'' when controlled to the probability variable state according to the game state controlled after the jackpot game state is finished. When controlled to the variable probability state, the display result of the variable display becomes "big win" at a higher rate than when it is not controlled to the variable probability state, and it is easy for the player to be controlled again to the big win game state as an advantageous state. Advantageous game value is given.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 9-4, when the jackpot type is "probability variation", it is determined that the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation". For example, in both cases of “5 times execution” and “10 times execution”, if the jackpot type is “non-probability variation”, the decision ratio of setting the suggested number of times to 0 is 100/100. Suggestion production is not executed. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is "Variable Probability", it is possible to determine the number of set suggestion times other than 0 at a ratio corresponding to the case of "5 times execution" and the case of "10 times execution". More specifically, in the case of "5 times execution", if the jackpot type is "probability variation", the decision ratio of setting the suggested number of times to 0 is 70/100, and the decision ratio of setting the suggested number of times to 1 is 70/100. 30/100. In the case of "executed 10 times", if the jackpot type is "probability variation", the decision ratio of setting the suggested number of times to 0 is 10/100, and the decision rate of setting the suggested number of times to 1 is 15/100. , the determination ratio of setting the suggested number of times to 2 is 20/100, the determination ratio of setting the number of suggestions to 3 is 25/100, and the determination rate of setting the number of suggestions to 4 is 30/100. Therefore, when the number of executions of the operation effect is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, the ratio of execution of the setting suggestion effect with the number of times of setting suggestion being other than 0 is increased. In addition, when the number of executions of the operation effect is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, it is possible to determine any of 2 to 4, which is the number of setting suggestions that are not determined in the case of 5 times, and more setting suggestions. The rate at which the production is executed is increased.

In this way, when the jackpot type is "probability variation", it is possible to execute setting suggestion production at a higher rate than "non-probability variation", so it is a jackpot type with a higher degree of advantage than when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation". In the case of "probability variation", it becomes possible to execute an operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect at a high rate in response to being controlled to a big win game state. In addition, only in the case of "probable variation", which is the most advantageous jackpot type among multiple types of jackpot gaming states such as "non-probability variation" or "probability variation", the operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect is performed. become viable. Among a plurality of types of jackpot game states, within a range controlled to a jackpot game state corresponding to "probability variation" of a jackpot type with a high degree of advantage, it is possible to execute an operation performance as a setting suggestion performance at a predetermined rate. In a range controlled to a jackpot game state corresponding to "unprobability variable" jackpot type with a low degree of advantage, a restriction may be provided as a limit that the operation performance as a setting suggestive performance is not executed. Alternatively, among a plurality of types of jackpot game states, in a range controlled to a jackpot game state corresponding to "probability variation" of a jackpot type with a high degree of advantage, it is possible to execute an operation performance that is a setting suggestion performance at a high rate. On the other hand, in the range controlled to the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the "unprobable variation" of the jackpot type with a low degree of advantage, there is a limit as a limit that the operation production that becomes the setting suggestion production can be executed at a low rate. may

FIG. 9-5 shows a configuration example of a setting suggestion pattern. In this configuration example, setting suggestion patterns 60AKC1 to 60AKC5 are prepared in advance as a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. Suggestion contents and corresponding characters are defined differently according to a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. The suggestion content is the content of the setting value suggested according to the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect. The corresponding character is a character indicated by an effect image displayed when the setting suggestion effect is executed. In the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC1, corresponding to the case where the set value is an odd number and the degree of expectation is high, the content of suggestion is "high degree of expectation with odd number setting" and the corresponding character is the character CH1. In the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC2, corresponding to the case where the set value is an even number and the degree of expectation is high, the content of suggestion is "high degree of expectation for even number setting" and the corresponding character is the character CH2. In the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC3, corresponding to the case where the set value is high setting (large value) and the degree of expectation is high, the content of suggestion is "high setting, high degree of expectation", and the corresponding character is the character CH3. In the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4, corresponding to the case where the setting value is confirmed to be 2 or more, the content of the suggestion is "the setting value is confirmed to be 2 or more", and the corresponding character is the character CH4. In the setting suggesting pattern 60AKC5, corresponding to the case where the set value is determined to be the highest value of 6, the suggested content is "the highest set value is determined" and the corresponding character is the character CH5. In this way, the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 makes it possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests that the setting value is the most advantageous for the player.

FIG. 9-6 shows an example of setting suggestion patterns determined by step 60AKS027 of the operation effect determination process. Among them, FIG. 9-6(A) shows a determination example in the case of the final operation effect in the operation effect of a plurality of times. Figure 9-6 (B1) and Figure 9-6 (B2) show an example of determination in the case of an operation effect other than the final one in a plurality of operation effects, and Figure 9-6 (B1) shows a setting suggestion pattern FIG. 9-6B2 is an example of determination when 60AKC4 is undetermined as a usage pattern, and FIG. 9-6B2 is an example of determination when setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 has been determined as a usage pattern. In step 60AKS027 of the operation effect determination process, setting suggestion patterns, which are usage patterns, are determined at a rate corresponding to the set values in the pachinko game machine 1 from the final operation effect to the previous operation effect. Here, the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 corresponds to the final operation effect, and when the setting value is 6, the determination ratio is 5/100, and in other cases, the determination ratio is 0/100. It becomes impossible to decide. Therefore, when the operation effect as the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5, which suggests that the setting value is the highest in the player's advantage, is the final operation effect. , and is not executed as an operation effect other than the final time. As a result, of the first timing and the second timing at which setting suggestion effects can be executed a plurality of times, the second timing, which is later than the first timing, has a higher rate of advantage for the player than the first timing. is the highest setting value.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 9-6, the determination ratio of the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is 5/100 when the setting value is 2 or more corresponding to the final operation effect. Further, if the suggestive setting pattern 60AKC4 is undetermined for the operation effects other than the final round, and if the set value is 2 or more, the determination ratio of the suggestive setting pattern 60AKC4 is 5/100. On the other hand, if the suggested setting pattern 60AKC4 has already been determined for the operation effects other than the final round, the determination ratio of the suggested setting pattern 60AKC4 becomes 0/100 regardless of the set value, and determination is disabled. . Therefore, when the operation effect as the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is executed once at a predetermined ratio as one of the operation effects, and then executed again or repeatedly in the same manner. prevent it from being done. In this way, when the operation effect that is the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is performed at a predetermined rate within a range where the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 has not yet been executed. becomes executable.

On the other hand, in the case where the operation effect as the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, the setting suggestion effect by the same setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is not executed in the range where the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 has already been executed. A limit is set as a limit. Further, since the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 can be executed only as the final operation effect, it is executed as the final setting suggestion effect when the operation effect as the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times. In the range where the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 is performed, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 can be executed at a predetermined rate, while the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 is not executed in the range where it is executed as the setting suggestion effect other than the final episode. Restrictions are provided as limitations. In this way, when an operation effect that is a setting-suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, the setting-suggestion effect by the setting-suggestion patterns 60AKC4 and 60AKC5 is performed at a predetermined rate within the range of being executed as one setting-suggestion effect. While it can be executed, there is a limit as a limit that it becomes impossible to execute within the range where it is executed as a setting suggestion effect multiple times. When an operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, among the setting suggestion effects by the plurality of setting suggestion patterns 60AKC1 to 60AKC5, the range of setting suggestion effects by the setting suggestion patterns 60AKC1 to 60AKC3 is performed in the same mode. While it may be executed, within the range of the setting suggestion rendering by the setting suggestion patterns 60AKC4 and 60AKC5, there is a limit as a limit that it is not executed in the same mode.

FIG. 9-7 shows an example of determination of the number of times of value notification by step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process. Among them, FIG. 9A shows an example of determination of the number of times of value notification in the case of "executed five times" in which the number of times of execution of the operation effect is five. FIG. 9-7(B) shows an example of determination of the number of times of value notification in the case of "10 executions" in which the number of executions of the operation presentation is 10 times. In step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process, the number of times of value notification is determined at a rate corresponding to the number of times of execution of the operation effect and the number of setting suggestions. The setting suggestion number is determined by step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process to be 0 or 1 if the number of times of execution of the operation effect is "executed 5 times", and 0 if the number of times of execution of the operation effect is "executed 10 times". to 4.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 9-7, the value notification frequency is determined so that the value notification effect is executed when the set suggestion frequency is other than zero. For example, in the case of "executed 5 times", if the set suggested number of times is 1, the determination ratio of the number of times of value notification to 1 is 100/100, and the value notification effect is always executed once. In the case of "execute 10 times", if the setting suggestion number is other than 0 (one of 1 to 4), the value notification number is determined to be one of 1 to 4 at a predetermined ratio. More specifically, in the case of "10 executions", if the setting suggestion number is other than 0, the decision ratio of setting the number of times of value notification to 1 is 55/100, and the decision ratio of setting the number of times of value notification to 2 is 55/100. 20/100, the determination ratio of 3 times of value notification is 15/100, and the determination ratio of 4 times of value notification is 10/100. Therefore, when it is reported whether or not a game value advantageous to the player is given by the value notification effect, a suggestion regarding the set value can be made by the setting suggestion effect. The setting suggesting performance can be executed at a predetermined ratio when controlled to a jackpot game state corresponding to "probability variation" of a jackpot type with a high advantage among a plurality of kinds of jackpot game states. In this case, it is possible to notify that a game value advantageous to the player is given by the value notification effect, and to suggest the set value by the setting suggestion effect. As a result, the operation effect as the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate within the range in which the operation effect as the value notification effect is executed, while the operation effect as the value notification effect is not executed. There is a limit as a limit that cannot be done. In addition, the operation effect that is the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a high rate in the range where the operation effect that is the value notification effect is executed, while the operation effect that is the value notification effect is not executed. A limit may be provided as a limit to what can be done with

In the determination example shown in FIG. 9-7, the number of times of value notification is determined so as to provide a case where the value notification effect is not executed when the number of setting suggestions is zero. For example, in the case of “five times execution”, if the setting suggestion number is 0, the decision ratio for setting the number of times of value notification to 0 is 70/100, and the decision ratio for setting the number of times of value notification to 1 is 30/100. be. In the case of "executed 10 times", if the setting suggestion number is 0, the decision ratio of setting the number of times of value notification to 0 is 10/100, and the decision ratio of setting the number of times of value notification to 1 is 15/100, The determination ratio of 2 times of value notification is 20/100, the determination ratio of 3 times of value notification is 25/100, and the determination ratio of 4 times of value notification is 30/100. As a result, when the operation effect is executed a plurality of times, the operation effect such as the setting suggestion effect or the value notification effect is not executed, and after the operation effect is completed, the display result of the variable display is "big hit". ” can be provided. Therefore, during the execution of the variable display, even if the number of times of execution of the operation effect reaches the number of times notified by the number of times notification effect and the execution of the operation effect ends, there is a possibility that the display result of the variable display will be a "big hit". is left, it is possible to prevent the player's sense of expectation from being lost due to the end of the operation presentation.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 9-7, it is possible to determine the number of value notification times other than 0 at a ratio corresponding to the cases of "five times execution" and "ten times execution". Then, when the number of executions of the operation effect is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, the number of times of value notification is set to other than 0 so that the ratio of execution of the value notification effect is increased. For example, in the case of "executed five times", the ratio of setting suggestion count to be set to 0 is higher than the ratio of setting suggestion count to be set to 1 other than 0 by step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process. On the other hand, in the case of "executed 10 times", the ratio of setting suggestion times to values other than 0 is higher than the ratio of setting suggestions to 0 by step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process. In the case of "executed 5 times", if the setting suggestion number is 0, the ratio of the value notification number being determined to be 1 other than 0 is higher than the ratio of being determined to be 0 by step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination processing. expensive. In the case of "execute 10 times", even if the setting suggestion count is 0, the rate of value notification counts determined to be other than 0 is higher than the rate of value notification counts determined to be 0 by step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process. . With such a setting, in the case of "execution of 10 times", which has a larger number of executions of the operation effect than "execution of 5 times", the rate of the number of times of value notification being determined to be other than 0 increases, and the value notification effect is executed. increase the rate of In addition, when the number of executions of the operation effect is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, it is possible to decide any one of 2 to 4, which is the number of times of value notification that is not determined in the case of 5 times, and more value notification is possible. What is necessary is just to make it possible to raise the ratio with which production|presentation is performed.

According to steps 60AKS025 and 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process, in the case of "executed 5 times", the number of times of setting suggestion and the number of times of value notification are both determined to be 0, and the ratio of neither the setting suggestion effect nor the value notification effect to be executed is high. In the case of "executed 10 times", the number of times of setting suggestion and the number of times of value notification are both determined to be other than 0, and the ratio of both the setting suggestion effect and the value notification effect to be executed increases. In this way, as the number of executions of the operation effects increases, the ratio of execution of the setting suggesting effects and the value notification effects may be increased. Further, when the number of executions of the operation effects is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the setting suggesting effect and the value notification effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the number is less than the predetermined number. As a result, it is possible to vary the player's expectations for the setting suggestion effect and the value notification effect according to the number of times the operation effect is executed.

FIG. 9-8 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process as the effect process during variable display regarding the characteristic portion 60AK. In the variable display production process, for example, based on the timer value of the production control process timer, it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, has elapsed (step 60AKS041). At this time, the timer value of the production control process timer is updated (for example, 1 subtraction), and when the end code is read from the production control pattern corresponding to the production control process timer value after the update, the variable display time It should be judged that it has passed. When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step 60AKS041; No), control is performed to execute various effects as the variable display progresses. The effect control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the effect control pattern determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. This command is transmitted to the display control unit 123, the audio control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. As a result, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on, off, or blinked. It is sufficient that various effects can be executed by a predetermined effect device by operating a movable member for effect, or by combining some or all of them.

In the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 9-8, it is determined whether or not it is the number of times notification effect period (step 60AKS042). The number-of-times notification effect period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern (operation effect control pattern, etc.) determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process, for example. When it is determined that it is the number-of-times notification effect period (step 60AKS042; Yes), control is performed to execute the number-of-times notification effect (step 60AKS043). By the control of step 60AKS043, it becomes possible to execute the number-of-times notification effect for performing notification corresponding to the number of times the operation effect is executed.

If it is determined at step 60AKS042 that it is not the number-of-times notification effect period (step 60AKS042; No), or after performing the control at step 60AKS043, it is determined whether or not it is the notice effect period (step 60AKS044). The notice effect period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern (operation effect control pattern, notice effect control pattern, etc.) determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process, for example. The notice effect period corresponding to the operation effect may be determined in advance so as to be later than the number-of-times notification effect period. When it is determined that it is the advance notice effect period (step 60AKS044; Yes), control is performed to execute the notice effect (step 60AKS045). By the control of step 60AKS045, it becomes possible to execute the operation effect as the advance notice effect.

When it is determined that it is not the advance notice effect period at step 60AKS044 (step 60AKS044; No), or after performing the control of step 60AKS045, it is determined whether or not it is the ready-to-win effect period (step 60AKS046). Reach production period, for example in the production control pattern (special figure fluctuation time production control pattern, etc.) determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process, it may be determined in advance. The ready-to-win effect period may be set after the advance notice effect period, or may be set so as to include at least part of the notice effect period. When it is determined that it is the ready-to-win effect period (step 60AKS046; Yes), control to execute the ready-to-win effect is performed (step 60AKS047). By the control of step 60AKS047, the ready-to-win effect can be executed.

When it is judged that it is not the ready-to-win effect period in step 60AKS046 (step 60AKS046; No), and after performing the control of step 60AKS047, it is judged whether or not it is the jackpot notification period (step 60AKS048). The jackpot notification period may be predetermined in the production control pattern (such as the special figure fluctuation production control pattern) determined at step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process, for example. The big hit notification period may be set in advance so as to be after the ready-to-win effect period. When it is determined that it is the jackpot notification period (step 60AKS048; Yes), control is performed to execute a jackpot notification effect (step 60AKS049). By the control of step 60AKS049, it becomes possible to notify that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state as an advantageous state in a predetermined period during execution of the variable display.

When it is determined that it is not the jackpot notification period at step 60AKS048 (step 60AKS048; No), and after performing the control at step 60AKS049, it is determined whether or not it is the value notification effect period (step 60AKS050). The value notification effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (operation effect control pattern, etc.) determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. The value notification effect period may be set so as to be later than the jackpot notification period, or may be set so as to include at least part of the jackpot notification period. When it is determined that it is the value notification effect period (step 60AKS050; Yes), control is performed to execute the value notification effect (step 60AKS051). By the control of step 60AKS051, it becomes possible to execute the operation effect as the value notification effect.

If it is determined at step 60AKS050 that it is not the value notification effect period (step 60AKS050; No), or after performing the control at step 60AKS051, it is determined whether or not it is the setting suggestion effect period (step 60AKS052). The setting suggestion effect period may be determined in advance, for example, in the effect control pattern during the big hit. The setting suggestion effect period should be set so as to be later than the value notification effect period. When it is determined that it is the setting suggestion effect period (step 60AKS052; Yes), control is performed to execute the setting suggestion effect (step 60AKS053). By the control of step 60AKS053, it becomes possible to execute the operation effect as the setting suggesting effect. If it is determined in step 60AKS052 that it is not the setting suggestion effect period (step 60AKS052; No), after performing the control in step 60AKS053, for example, in the setting in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern Based on this, control is performed to execute effects during variable display including the variable display operation of decorative patterns (step 60AKS054), and then the process during variable display ends.

When it is determined at step 60AKS041 that the variable display time has elapsed (step 60AKS041; Yes), it is determined whether or not a pattern confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step 60AKS055). At this time, if the pattern confirmation command is not received (step 60AKS055; No), the effect processing during variable display is terminated and the game waits. After the variable display time elapses, if a predetermined time elapses without receiving the design confirmation command, predetermined error processing is executed in response to the fact that the design confirmation command could not be received normally. You may do so. When the pattern confirmation command is received (step 60AKS055; Yes), for example, a predetermined display control command is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, which results in a variable display of the decorative pattern. Control for deriving and displaying the final stop symbol (determined decorative symbol) is performed (step 60AKS056). Subsequently, a predetermined time is set as a wait time for receiving a jackpot start designation command (step 60AKS057). Also, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3" corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step 60AKS058), the effect process during variable display is terminated.

FIG. 9-9 shows execution periods and execution timings of various effects with respect to the characteristic portion 60AK. Among them, FIG. 9-9(A) shows the execution period and the execution timing of the variable display-related effect including the mode of variable display of decorative patterns. FIG. 9-9(B) shows execution periods and execution timings of operation-related effects including number-of-times notification effects and operation effects. When the variable display is started at timing T0, it becomes a number-of-times notification effect period. During the number-of-times notification effect period, the number-of-times notification effect is executed by the control in step 60AKS043 of the effect processing during variable display.

After that, when the number-of-times notification effect period ends at timing T1, it becomes a notice effect period. During the notice effect period, the operation effect, which is the notice effect, can be executed by the control in step 60AKS045 of the effect process during variable display. For example, when an operation effect that is a plurality of advance notice effects is executed, each time advance notice effect included in the multiple advance notice effects, such as the first notice, the second notice, etc., is executed in order. . The notice effect period is not only the period in which the pre-reach variation is performed before the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, but also the post-reach variation after the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode. part of the period may be included. By executing the operation effect as the notice effect during the notice effect period, the display result of the variable display is changed to "big hit" based on the detection of the action of the player such as the pressing operation of the push button 31B, for example. It becomes possible to execute a performance that foretells what will happen.

In the variable display of the decorative symbols, for example, when the fixed decorative symbols of the big winning combination are stopped and displayed, the big winning notification is executed at the timing T2. In the effect process during variable display, when it is determined in step 60AKS048 that it is the jackpot notification period, the control in step 60AKS049 enables execution of the jackpot notification effect. At this time, it becomes a value notification performance period. During the value notification effect period, the control in step 60AKS051 of the variable display effect process makes it possible to execute the operation effect as the value notification effect. For example, when an operation effect that is a value notification effect is executed multiple times, each value notification effect included in the value notification effect of multiple times, such as the first notification, the second notification, etc., is performed in order. executed. By executing the operation performance as the value reporting performance during the value reporting performance period, based on detection of the action of the player, such as the pressing operation of the push button 31B, for example, after the jackpot game state is completed, the probability variable state is set. It becomes possible to execute an effect for informing whether or not to be controlled.

Subsequently, special time notification is executed at timing T3, and the setting suggestion effect period begins. During the setting suggesting effect period, the control in step 60AKS053 of the effect processing during variable display makes it possible to execute the operation effect as the setting suggesting effect. For example, when an operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect is executed multiple times, each setting suggestion effect included in the setting suggestion effect such as the first suggestion, the second suggestion, and so on is sequentially performed. executed. By executing the operation effect as the setting suggestion effect in the setting suggestion effect period, based on the detection of the player's action such as the pressing operation of the push button 31B, for example, the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 It becomes possible to execute a production that makes a suggestion. After that, when the timing T4 is reached, the variable display ends and the big win starts, and the control of the big win game state is started.

In this way, when operation effects are executed a plurality of times, it is possible to provide a number-of-times notification effect period, an advance notice effect period, a value notification effect period, and a setting suggestion effect period. In the number-of-times notification effect period, a number-of-times notification effect for performing notification corresponding to the number of executions of the operation effect is executed. During the notice performance period, an operation performance serving as a notice performance for notifying that the game will be controlled to the jackpot game state is executed. During the value notification effect period, an operation effect serving as a value notification effect for informing whether or not to be controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game state is executed. During the setting suggestion effect period, an operation effect as a setting suggestion effect for suggesting a setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed. When the number of times of value notification is 0, the value notification effect period may not be provided, and when the number of times of setting suggestion is 0, the setting suggestion effect period may not be provided.

The advance notice effect period and the value notification effect period are included in the predetermined period during which the operation effect can be executed. The setting suggestion effect period is included in the specific period during which the operation effect can be executed after the predetermined period has elapsed. The value notification effect period is started when the big hit notification is performed at timing T2. The big-hit notification by the big-hit notification performance makes it possible to notify that it is controlled to the big-hit game state in a predetermined period. The setting suggestive effect can be executed as an operation effect of the suggestive effect mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period when the big win is reported at the timing T2.

In step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process, when the jackpot type is "probability variation", the set suggestion frequency is determined to be other than 0 at a higher rate than when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", and the setting suggestion effect is performed. Feasibly determined. In step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process, when the setting suggestion frequency is other than 0, the value notification frequency is determined to be other than 0, and it is determined that the value notification effect can be executed. Therefore, among a plurality of types of jackpot game states such as "non-probability change" or "probability change", the jackpot type is controlled to a jackpot game state corresponding to the "probability change" of the jackpot type with a high degree of advantage, A predetermined period elapses at a higher rate than when the notification of controlling to the jackpot game state with the low advantage is performed when the notification of the control to the jackpot game state with the high advantage is performed by the value notification performance. In a later specific period, it becomes possible to execute the setting suggestive effect as the operation effect of the suggestive effect mode.

Even when an operation performance such as a notice performance or a value notification performance is made executable in a prescribed period, it is difficult to raise a player's expectation after the prescribed period elapses when these operation performances are terminated. On the other hand, according to the present invention, it is possible to execute the setting suggestive effect as the operation effect of the suggestive effect mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period. As expected from the operation performance of the suggestive performance mode, the performance can be diversified and the game interest can be improved.

Further, in step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process, only when the jackpot type is "probability variable", the setting suggestion number is determined to be other than 0, and the setting suggestion effect is determined to be executable. In step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process, when the setting suggestion frequency is other than 0, the value notification frequency is determined to be other than 0, and it is determined that the value notification effect can be executed. Therefore, according to being controlled to the jackpot game state corresponding to the "probability change" of the jackpot type with the highest advantage among a plurality of types of jackpot game states such as "non-probability change" or "probability change". Only when the value notification performance is controlled to the jackpot game state with the highest degree of advantage, the setting suggestion performance can be executed as the operation performance of the suggestion performance mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period. Become.

In general, it is difficult to raise the player's expectation even more after the notification that the game is controlled to a high-advantage jackpot game state is performed. On the other hand, the present invention makes it possible to execute the setting suggestion effect as the operation effect of the suggestion effect mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period, and provides a case where the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is suggested. Even after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, it is possible to diversify the performances so as to expect the operation performance of the suggestive performance mode, thereby improving the game interest.

9-10 and 9-11 show an execution example of operation effects. In this execution example, the number of executions of the operation presentation is determined to be "10 times", and the number of times of value notification and the number of setting suggestions are both determined to be two. Therefore, after the operation performance serving as the notice performance is executed six times, the notice performance period ends and the big win is announced. FIG. 9-10(A) shows an effect execution example 60AKD1 when the big win notification is executed by the big win notification effect. At this time, a big hit notification effect including display of a message such as "battle win!" and display of a effect image showing a character is executed. In addition, a normal pattern representing the number "6" is displayed as a decorative pattern stopped and displayed together in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. As the remaining number of executions of the operation effect, an effect image indicating "remaining number of operations: 4" is also displayed. When the decoration pattern of the non-probability variable jackpot combination consisting of the same normal symbols is displayed, the jackpot type is controlled to the jackpot game state corresponding to the "non-probability variable", giving the impression that it is not controlled to the probability variable state. , given to the player.

FIG. 9-10(B) shows an effect execution example 60AKD2 when the value notification effect period is started. At this time, a message indicating 4, which is the remaining number of operation effects, is displayed as the executable number of the operation effects as the value notification effect. FIG. 9-10(C) shows an effect execution example 60AKD3 when the first value notification effect is started. In this case, by displaying an effect image showing the push button 31B, the player's action such as pressing the push button 31B is prompted. FIG. 9-10(D) shows an effect execution example 60AKD4 when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected in the first value notification effect. Here, based on the detection of the action of the player, which is the pressing operation on the push button 31B, the fact that the big hit type is "probability variable" is not notified, so that the probability variable state after the end of the big hit game state A failure notification effect that gives an impression of being uncontrolled is executed. In addition, an effect image indicating “remaining number of operations: 3” is displayed as the remaining number of executions of the operation effect.

FIG. 9-10(E) shows an effect execution example 60AKD5 when the second value notification effect is started. At this time, similarly to the case where the first value notification effect is started, an effect image showing the push button 31B is displayed to prompt the player to press the push button 31B. FIG. 9-10(F) shows an effect execution example 60AKD6 when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected in the second value notification effect. Here, based on the detection of the action of the player, which is the pressing operation on the push button 31B, the fact that the jackpot type is "variable probability" is performed, so that the variable probability state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. A success notification effect for notifying that it is controlled is executed. In addition, as decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed in the "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the normal design that indicates the number "6" is a probability variation design that indicates the number "7". changed and displayed. When the decoration pattern of the probability variable big hit combination consisting of the same probability variable symbols is displayed, the big win type is controlled to the big win game state corresponding to "variable probability", and the player is informed that it is controlled to the variable probability state. becomes recognizable. In addition, an effect image indicating “remaining number of operations: 2” is displayed as the remaining number of executions of the operation effect.

FIG. 9-10(G) shows an effect execution example 60AKD7 when the setting suggestion effect period is started. At this time, along with notification of the special time, a message is displayed that notifies 2, which is the remaining number of operation effects, as the number of executable times of the operation effects as setting suggestion effects.

FIG. 9-11(A) shows an effect execution example 60AKD8 when the first setting suggestion effect is started. In this case, by displaying the effect image corresponding to the setting suggesting effect and the effect image showing the push button 31B, the player's action such as pressing the push button 31B is prompted. FIG. 9-11(B) shows an effect execution example 60AKD9 when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected in the first setting suggestion effect. In this case, an effect image showing the character CH2, which is the corresponding character, is displayed as the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC2. By displaying the characters CH1 to CH5 corresponding to the suggested setting patterns 60AKC1 to 60AKC5 in order on the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5, the advantage corresponding to the character indicated by the displayed effect image can be displayed. , are recognizable by the player.

FIG. 9-11(C) shows an effect execution example 60AKD10 when the second setting suggestion effect is started. At this time, as in the case where the first setting suggestion effect is started, the effect image corresponding to the setting suggestion effect and the effect image showing the push button 31B are displayed, and the player can press the push button 31B. action is prompted. FIG. 9-11(D) shows an effect execution example 60AKD11 when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected in the second setting suggestion effect. In this case, an effect image showing the character CH4, which is the corresponding character, is displayed as the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4. FIG. 9-11(E) shows an effect execution example 60AKD12 when the setting suggestion effect period ends. At this time, the display result of the corresponding character in the setting suggestion effect that has already been executed may be displayed so that the player can recognize it. FIG. 9-11(F) shows an effect execution example 60AKD13 in the case of stop-displaying decoration symbols of a probability variable big hit combination which is a fixed decoration symbol in response to the end of the variable display. After that, when the display result of the variable display becomes "big win", the control of the big win game state is started.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and in order to solve at least one problem in the prior art, It may be provided with a part of the configuration.

As a specific example, instead of the decision example shown in FIG. 9-4, for example, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", at a higher rate than when the jackpot type is "probability variation", setting suggestion production may be determined feasibly. In the determination example shown in FIG. 9-4, the setting suggestion number may be determined by the ratio of the case where the jackpot type is "non-probability variation" and "probability variation" are interchanged. In this way, if the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", if the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than "probability variation", the jackpot type is less advantageous than the case of "probability variation" In the case of a certain "non-probability variable", it becomes possible to execute an operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect at a high rate in response to being controlled to a big hit game state. In addition, only in the case of "non-probability variation", which is the jackpot type with the lowest degree of advantage among multiple types of jackpot gaming states such as "non-probability variation" or "probability variation", the operation performance that becomes the setting suggestion performance may be made executable. In these cases as well, it is possible to diversify the effects and improve the game interest so as to expect the operation effects of the suggestive effect mode.

As a plurality of types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage, the jackpot types may be controllable to jackpot game states with different numbers of rounds instead of the jackpot game states with "non-probability variable" or "probability variable". For example, "4R" with 4 rounds, "6R" with 6 rounds, "8R" with 8 rounds, and "10R" with 10 rounds. may be provided. In this case, as the number of rounds increases, the number of prize balls that the player can acquire increases, so the player's advantage should be increased. The value notification effect may be a effect of notifying the player of the number of prize balls that the player can acquire according to the number of rounds. Also in such a case, among a plurality of kinds of jackpot game states, in response to being controlled to a jackpot game state with a high degree of advantage, there is a notification that is controlled to a jackpot game state with a high degree of advantage by the value notification effect. When it is performed, the set suggestive performance is set as the operation performance of the suggestive performance mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period at a higher rate than when the notification of being controlled to the jackpot game state with a low advantage is performed. Make it executable. In addition, in accordance with the control to the jackpot game state with the highest degree of advantage among a plurality of types of jackpot game states, the value notification effect is performed to notify that the jackpot game state is controlled to the highest degree of advantage. Only in this case, the setting suggestive effect may be executable as the operation effect of the suggestive effect mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period. In these cases as well, it is possible to diversify the effects and improve the game interest so as to expect the operation effects of the suggestive effect mode.

On the other hand, in response to being controlled to a jackpot game state with a low advantage among a plurality of kinds of jackpot game states, a value notification effect is performed to inform the player that the jackpot game state is controlled to a jackpot game state with a low advantage. In this case, the set suggestive performance can be executed as the operation performance of the suggestive performance mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period at a higher rate than when the notification of controlling to the jackpot game state with a high degree of advantage is performed. may Alternatively, in response to being controlled to the jackpot game state with the lowest advantage among a plurality of types of jackpot game states, a value notification effect is performed to control to the jackpot game state with the lowest advantage. Only in this case, the setting suggestive effect may be executable as the operation effect of the suggestive effect mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period. In these cases as well, it is possible to diversify the effects and improve the game interest so as to expect the operation effects of the suggestive effect mode.

In addition, the player's advantage in a plurality of kinds of advantageous states may be varied according to whether or not any game value is awarded and the content of the game value to be awarded. For example, when the game is controlled to the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, the player's advantage may be varied by varying the upper limit number of variable displays that can be executed in the time-saving state. Alternatively, when the variable probability state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state, the player's advantage may be varied by varying the jackpot probability in the variable probability state. The player's advantage may be varied by varying the number of consecutive wins, which is the number of times the game is repeatedly controlled to the jackpot game state without being controlled to the normal state. Furthermore, the value that can be imparted in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the game value related to the execution of the game itself. It may include part or all of executing a specific effect, such as playing a sound or displaying an image showing a two-dimensional code. The image indicating the two-dimensional code may include information that enables acquisition of predetermined digital content by photographing with a terminal device (portable terminal) possessed by the player. Values that can be imparted in the pachinko game machine 1 may include performance points different from those for executing a specific performance.

The number of executions of the operation effect is not limited to the case of "executed 5 times", which is 5 times, or the case of "executed 10 times", which is 10 times. It is acceptable if it can be set. Also in this case, when the number of times of execution of the operation presentation is large, the number of times of setting suggestion may be set to other than 0 at a higher rate than when the number of times of execution of the operation presentation is small so that the setting suggestion presentation can be executed. In addition, when the number of times of execution of operation effects is large, it is possible to set the setting suggestion number of times that is not determined when the number of times of execution of operation effects is small, or to increase the ratio of executing more setting suggestion effects. may

Instead of the decision example shown in FIG. 9-6, a restriction may be provided so that the setting suggestion rendering by the same setting suggestion pattern is not executed for all of the plurality of setting suggestion patterns. In addition, regardless of whether or not the operation presentation is the final round, and whether or not the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 has already been determined, the setting suggestion pattern is determined at the common determination ratio, and then the predetermined difference is determined. When the replacement condition is satisfied, the determined setting suggestion pattern may be replaced with another setting suggestion pattern, thereby restricting the execution of the setting suggestion performance based on the same setting suggestion pattern. Alternatively, a setting suggestion effect based on the same setting suggestion pattern may be repetitively executed for a plurality of setting suggestion patterns.

The setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 may be determined at different ratios depending on, for example, the number of setting suggestions, not only whether or not it is the final operation effect. When the setting suggestion count is large, the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 can be determined at a higher rate than when the setting suggestion count is small, and the confirmation notification that the set value is 6 may be easily executed. Alternatively, when the setting suggestion count is large, the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 can be determined at a lower rate than when the setting suggestion count is small, and the confirmation notification that the setting value is 6 may be difficult to execute. .

A setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 may be restricted so that it is not executed as a setting suggestion effect by the same setting suggestion pattern until a predetermined cancellation condition is satisfied after being executed once. . For example, in a period in which the jackpot game state is repeatedly controlled without being controlled to the normal state, the cancellation condition is not established, and after the setting suggestion performance by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 is executed once, the same setting suggestion pattern is executed. It may be restricted so that it is not executed as a setting suggestion effect by . When the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 is executed, it is confirmed that the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, and it becomes possible to recognize that the set value has a high advantage for the player. , it is possible to increase the rarity of such a setting suggestion effect and improve the game interest.

Instead of the setting suggesting effect, or when an operation effect serving as a notice effect is executed together with the setting suggesting effect, the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 may be suggested. For example, as the plurality of notice effect patterns, there are notice effect patterns with different decision ratios depending on the set values in the pachinko game machine 1, and notice effect patterns that can be determined only when the set values in the pachinko game machine 1 are specific values. may be provided. More specifically, when the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, it is possible to decide on a notice performance pattern that notifies a message of "reliability 66%", or the decision ratio of the notice performance pattern is increased. Thus, it is sufficient that the determined values in the announcement effect pattern determination table are assigned to a plurality of announcement effect patterns. By executing the operation performance as the advance notice performance and suggesting the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, the advance notice performance can be executed as the operation performance of the suggestive performance mode in a predetermined period before the specific period. becomes. In addition to the operation effect that is the advance notice effect, the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 may be suggested when the operation effect that is the value notification effect is executed. By executing the operation performance as the value notification performance and suggesting the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, the value notification performance is performed as the operation performance of the suggestion performance mode in a predetermined period before the specific period. becomes executable. As a result, it is possible to diversify the performances so as to draw attention to the operation performances for giving advance notice and information, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In the operation effect determination process shown in FIG. 9B, instead of steps 60AKS025 to 60AKS029, the number of times of value notification may be determined and then the number of setting suggestions may be determined. In this case, when the number of times of value notification is determined to be other than 0, the number of times of setting suggestion can be determined, and when the number of times of value notification is determined to be 0, the number of times of setting suggestion is not determined, and a setting suggestion effect is produced. may not be executed. In this way, when it is reported whether or not a game value that is advantageous to the player is given by the value notification effect, it is only necessary to suggest the setting value by the setting suggestion effect.

The setting suggesting effect is not limited to an effect suggesting a setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, and may be an effect suggesting whether or not the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 has been changed, for example. For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include setting suggestion patterns with different determination ratios depending on whether or not the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. When the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, the setting suggestion performance is executed by the setting suggestion pattern determined at a high rate so that the player can recognize that the setting value has been changed. , the performance can be diversified and the amusement of the game can be improved.

At least part of the predetermined period or part or all of the specific period may be included in the period after the end of the variable display. For example, while the variable display is being executed, the operation effect as the advance notice effect is executed, and the operation effect as the value notification effect and the setting suggesting effect may not be executed. After that, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the value notification production is performed along with the execution of the big hit start production (fanfare production) and the production during the big hit (production corresponding to the first and second rounds, etc.) Alternatively, an operation effect that serves as a setting suggesting effect may be made executable. The operation effects such as the advance notice effect, the value notification effect, and the setting suggestion effect may be executable in any order. A case may be provided in which the setting suggestion effect is executed without executing the value notification effect.

In addition to the pressing operation on the push button 31B, the operation effect may be executed based on detection of a tilting operation on the stick controller 31A. When the operation effect using the stick controller 31A is executed, the effect mode in which the player's advantage is high at a higher rate than when the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed. good. For example, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 is such that the ratio of determination of the operation effect using the push button 31B is 0/100 and the ratio of determination of the operation effect using the stick controller 31A is 100/100. A determined value in the pattern determination table may be assigned to multiple setting suggestion patterns.

The configuration for detecting the action of the player is not limited to the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. may be possible. Further, a sensor capable of detecting any action other than the action of inputting an instruction by the player, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. A predetermined camera may be used to analyze the result of photographing an object such as a player's hand (video motion capture), and an arbitrary action may be detected as a predetermined operation. That is, the configuration for detecting the action of the player may be any configuration that can detect the action of any object mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically.

Various restrictions may be based on arbitrary ranges and limits as long as they do not deviate from the objectives, problems to be solved, and other gist of the present invention. The range of restrictions may be any condition that makes the presence or absence, ratio, or other amount of processing, control, or action execution different. Any content that is different (for example, whether to stop or reduce, degree of reduction, etc.) may be used.

(Description of Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 60AK)
A game machine such as a pachinko game machine 1 that is advantageous to the player, for example, can be controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state, and a plurality of set values having different degrees of advantage for the player, for example, from 1 to 6. A setting means such as the CPU 103 that executes the setting value change process of FIGS. Based on the detection of the action of the player, for example, the processing of steps 60AKS045, 60AKS051, 60AKS053 shown in FIG. Action effect execution means such as the effect control CPU 120, and a notification corresponding to the number of times the action effect is executed, for example, the process of step 60AKS043 shown in FIG. 9-8 can be executed. In the execution pattern of the action effect by the action effect executing means, the action effect of the number of times indicated in the notification effect is executed within a predetermined period, for example, variable display A first execution pattern such as when the result is not a "jackpot" or when the set suggestion number of times is determined to be 0, and an action performance with a smaller number of execution times than indicated in the notification performance are executed within a predetermined period. , and a second execution pattern in which, after the predetermined period of time has passed, the action rendering of the remaining number of executions is executed, for example, when the variable display result is "jackpot" and the set suggestion number determination result is other than 0. , the action effect executing means, for example, as shown in FIGS. It is viable. As a result, it is possible to diversify the presentation and improve the game interest.

Equipped with advantageous notification means such as the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of step 60AKS049 shown in FIG. When the variable display result is determined to be a "jackpot" in the processing of step 60AKS024 shown in 9-2, when the notification by the advantageous notification means such as the part that executes the processing of step 60AKS025 is performed, a predetermined period of time In a specific period after the elapse, it may be possible to execute the action rendering of the suggestive rendering mode. As a result, it is possible to diversify the performances and improve the amusement of the game so as to draw attention to the action performances of the suggestive performance mode.

As advantageous states, for example, a first advantageous state such as when the jackpot type is "non-variable", and a second advantageous state, such as when the jackpot type is "variable", is more advantageous than the first advantageous state. 9-4, for example, when the advantageous notification means notifies that the second advantageous state is controlled. may be able to execute the action rendering of the suggestive rendering mode in the specific period at a higher rate than when the advantageous notification means reports that the control to the first advantageous state is performed. As a result, it is possible to diversify the performances and improve the amusement of the game so as to expect the action performances of the suggestive performance mode.

As advantageous states, for example, a first advantageous state such as when the jackpot type is "non-variable", and a second advantageous state, such as when the jackpot type is "variable", is more advantageous than the first advantageous state. It is possible to control to a plurality of types of advantageous states including, and the operation effect execution means is, for example, when the jackpot type "non-probability variation" and "probability variation" shown in FIG. 9-4 are exchanged. When the notification of being controlled to the first advantageous state by the advantageous notification means is made, the suggestion is made in a specific period at a higher rate than when the notification of being controlled to the second advantageous state by the advantageous notification means It may be possible to execute the action rendering of the rendering mode. As a result, it is possible to diversify the performances and improve the amusement of the game so as to expect the action performances of the suggestive performance mode.

As the advantageous state, it is possible to control to a plurality of types of advantageous states, such as different degrees of advantage for the player, for example, the type of jackpot is either ``non-probability variation'' or ``probability variation''. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-4, only when the advantage informing means informs that the control is to be in an advantageous state with the highest degree of advantage, it is possible to execute the motion effect of the suggestive effect mode during a specific period. may As a result, it is possible to diversify the performances and improve the amusement of the game so as to expect the action performances of the suggestive performance mode.

The action effect executing means, for example, when the set suggestion number of times shown in FIG. , which can be executed a plurality of times in a specific period after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, and restricts execution of the action rendering of the suggestive rendering mode in the same mode included in the plurality of modes, for example, step 60AKS027 shown in FIG. 9-2. Limiting means such as the effect control CPU 120 that determines the setting suggestion pattern at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-6 in the processing of . As a result, it is possible to diversify the presentation and improve the game interest.

The action effect execution means performs the action effect of the suggestion effect mode at a first timing such as the execution timing of the first suggestion, for example, and a second suggestion later than the first timing, for example, in a specific period after the elapse of the predetermined period. can be executed at the second timing such as the execution timing of, for example, as shown in FIGS. may be executed at a higher rate at the second timing than at the first timing. As a result, it is possible to diversify the effects and improve the game interest so as to draw attention to the action effects of the suggestive effect mode.

The action effect executing means may be capable of executing, in a predetermined period of time, an action effect that announces control to be in an advantageous state in a suggestive effect mode. As a result, it is possible to diversify the performances so as to draw attention to the motion performances for giving advance notice, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(Description of Characteristic Portions 91AK and 92AK)
FIG. 10-1 shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the effect control board 12 regarding the characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 10-1, various circuits such as a production control microprocessor 91AK100, an input circuit 91AK121, a memory controller 91AK122, a production data memory 91AK123, a ROM91AK124, a RAM91AK125, and a watchdog timer 91AK126 are mounted on the production control board 12. ing. The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, a VDP 91AK132, a voice processing circuit 91AK133, a lamp control circuit 91AK134, a motor control circuit 135, and a built-in memory 91AK136. The VDP 91AK132 includes an instruction decoder 91AK141, a demultiplexer 91AK142, a video decoder 91AK143, a moving image renderer 91AK144, a character image renderer 91AK145, a text image renderer 91AK146, a VRAM 91AK147, and a display drive circuit 91AK148. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 includes an audio decoder 91AK151.

The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 executes data processing and signal processing based on the effect control commands received from the main substrate 11, thereby controlling the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamps 9 and other decorations. It may be an integrated processor in which a circuit capable of controlling the execution of the production using some or all of the plurality of production devices, such as the LED for the display and the movable members for production such as the movable body 32, is integrated on one chip. . In addition, the performance control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, a VDP 91AK132 and a built-in memory 91AK136. It may be provided outside the 91AK100.

The input circuit 91AK121 may include a buffer circuit or the like. The buffer circuit of the input circuit 91AK121 is used to receive the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The memory controller 91AK122 executes various processes on the data stored in the performance data memory 91AK123 in accordance with the request signal supplied from the performance control microprocessor 91AK100. The effect data memory 91AK123 preliminarily stores effect data that can be used to execute effects using the effect device, such as various image data representing images displayed on the image display device 5, for example. The image data stored in the effect data memory 91AK123 may include moving image data and still image data. As the still image data, there is character image data, which is sprite image data, which is a plurality of types of image element data corresponding to a plurality of types of effect images, such as a plurality of types of decoration patterns that are variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. It would be nice if it was prepared. The effect image corresponding to the decorative design may be included in the character image. In addition, an arbitrary character image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, specifically, an effect image showing a person, a figure, a symbol, etc., and image data of a background image are stored in advance in the effect data memory 91AK123. It is good if there is. As still image data, for example, text image data that enables characters to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 may be prepared. In addition to the image data, the performance data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the audio data used for audio output by the speakers 8L and 8R. The effect data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the lamp drive data used to drive the lighting of the light-emitting members such as the game effect lamps 9 and the decorative LEDs. The effect data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the motor drive data used for rotationally driving the drive motor that operates the movable member such as the movable body 32 . The effect data memory 91AK123 may be a non-volatile semiconductor memory that can be electrically erased, written, or rewritten, such as a NAND flash memory. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a state of normal use in which the progression of effects is controlled, the effect data memory 91AK123 is used as a read-only storage device.

ROM91AK124 memorize|stores a computer program, fixed data, etc. for production|presentation control. RAM91AK125 provides a work area to CPU91AK131 of microprocessor 91AK100 for production control. The watchdog timer 91AK126 has a counter circuit that counts up or down based on the setting of an internal register, and when the measurement time passes the start time (timeout time) and timeout occurs, it becomes a time elapsing signal. generate a signal. The time-out signal is input to the CPU 91AK131 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100. Due to the generation of the time-out signal, the CPU 91AK131 enters a reset state and restarts the effect control microprocessor 91AK100.

The ROM 91AK 124 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the performance operation in addition to the program for effect control. For example, in the ROM91AK124, the CPU91AK131 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100 comprises a plurality of determination tables prepared for various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting a determination table, and various performance control patterns. Pattern data and the like are stored. The effect control pattern includes, for example, effect control execution data (display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, motor control data, operation detection control data, etc.) associated with the effect control process timer judgment value, end code, etc. It consists of process data. Part or all of the effect control pattern and effect control execution data may be configured as a display list. The display list is data of a command group describing a series of transfer commands to be executed by the VDP 91AK 132 according to the order of image processing. The display list may include a display control command group, a voice control command group, a lamp control command group, and a motor control command group in a mixed manner. By controlling the progress of the presentation using such a display list, it is sufficient to control the electrical components for presentation in cooperation with each other. The RAM 91AK 125 stores programs and various data used to control electrical parts for presentation. CPU91AK131 should just be able to read the program and data stored in RAM91AK125 in read-out time shorter than the read-out time of the program and data stored in ROM91AK124.

CPU91AK131 performs control processing according to the computer program for production|presentation control. At this time, the CPU 91AK 131 executes an effect control process for controlling the progress of the effect by the effect electric parts according to the program read from the ROM 91AK 124 . The production control process includes, for example, a fixed data reading process in which the CPU91AK131 reads fixed data from the ROM91AK124, a variable data writing process in which the CPU91AK131 writes various variable data to the RAM91AK125 and temporarily stores them, and various variation data read processing for reading variation data, reception processing for CPU 91AK 131 to accept input of various signals from the outside, transmission processing for CPU 91 AK 131 to output various signals to the outside, or part or all of these processing good too.

The VDP 91AK 132 determines the content of image display control in the image display device 5 based on display control commands from the CPU 91AK 131, register settings, and the like. For example, the VDP 91AK 132 determines the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, thereby performing control for executing variable display of decorative symbols and various effect displays. The VDP91AK132 is an image processor having image data processing functions such as a high-speed drawing function, moving image data separation function, and video decoding function. The VDP 91AK132 may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or an image processing microprocessor generally called a DSP (Digital Signal Processor).

The command decoder 91AK141 decodes the command portion (command code) included in the display control command from the CPU 91AK131 and instructs image processing or the like according to the decoding result. For example, a display control instruction group included in the decoded result is supplied to the internal circuit of the VDP91AK132. The instruction decoder 91AK141 may generate a control signal according to the decoding result and supply it to the internal circuit of the VDP 91AK132. The command group for voice control included in the decoding result may be supplied to the voice processing circuit 91AK133. The instruction group for lamp control included in the decoded result may be supplied to the lamp control circuit 91AK134. The instruction group for motor control included in the decoding result may be supplied to the motor control circuit 91AK135.

The demultiplexer 91AK142 receives moving image data read from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the like, separates the data into video data and audio data, and outputs the data. The video data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the video decoder 91AK143. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compression-encoded video data and outputs it. The video data output from the video decoder 91AK143 is supplied to the moving image renderer 91AK144. The video decoder 91AK143 may read compression-encoded character image data or text image data from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like, decompress and decode it, and then supply it to the character image renderer 91AK145 or text image renderer 91AK146.

The moving image renderer 91AK144 writes and stores the video data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143 in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes image processing capable of adjusting the hue, saturation, and brightness of the image shown in the image data, or a part or all of these, and temporarily stores the adjusted image data in the VRAM 91AK147. may The character image renderer 91AK145 receives character image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like and character image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and writes and stores the data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 may convert the character image data in vector format into bitmap format and temporarily store it in the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 may perform image conversion processing for displaying the character image designated by the character image designation information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the character display setting information. good. The text image renderer 91AK146 receives text image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like and text image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and writes and stores them in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 may convert the text image data in vector format into bitmap format and temporarily store it in the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 may perform image conversion processing for displaying the text image specified by the text image specifying information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. good.

The VRAM 91AK 147 temporarily stores image data and provides a work area for image data processing by the VDP 91AK 132 . The VRAM 91AK 147 may be provided with areas such as a palette area in which palette data is arranged, a character buffer in which character image data is stored, a text buffer in which text image data is stored, and a CG buffer. The CG buffer temporarily stores palette data that defines the display colors of characters and text when drawing processing is executed by the VDP91AK132, and temporarily stores display data for effect images created by drawing processing. used for storage. The display drive circuit 91AK148 is a circuit for outputting a signal for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5 . The display drive circuit 91AK148 outputs a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal) and scanning signal (drive control signal) to the image display device 5 along with a color signal (grayscale control signal) corresponding to the display data created in the VDP 91AK132. do it.

A frame buffer may be provided within VRAM 91AK147 or in a memory module separate from VRAM 91AK147, such as internal memory 91AK136. The frame buffer provides a virtual display area in which display data of effect images created by drawing processing by the VDP 91AK132 is expanded and stored. The display data stored in the frame buffer is bitmap format image data (pixel data, raster data). The frame buffer stores display data of various images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, for example, and display data of various images that are not displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. A virtual display area may be included. Alternatively, display data for displaying a screen having the same size as the display screen of the image display device 5 is created in the virtual display area of the frame buffer, and the display data of the virtual display area is supplied to the display drive circuit 91AK148. Thus, the image may be output to the image display device 5 side.

For example, an image display area and an image drawing area are allocated to the storage area of the frame buffer. Display data for displaying an effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 is stored in the image display area. The image drawing area stores the display data of each effect image created by the drawing process. The image display area and the image drawing area may be switched each time a V-blank occurs. A V-blank occurs at a period when the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is updated. Each time V-blank is started, a V-blank interrupt signal may be output from the VDP 91AK132 to the CPU 91AK131, and various interrupt signals may be output from the VDP 91AK132 to the CPU 91AK131. By switching between the image display area and the image drawing area each time a V-blank occurs, display data for each effect image is created in the storage area allocated as the image-drawing area in a certain V-blank cycle (first drawing display period). At the same time that the drawing process is performed, this storage area is switched to the image display area in the next V blank period (second drawing display period). Therefore, the display data created by the drawing process in the first drawing display period is output to the image display device 5 in the second drawing display period, and the image drawing area is allocated in the second drawing display period. In the storage area, the display data created by the drawing process is stored.

The audio processing circuit 91AK133 generates audio signals that enable audio output using the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 91AK132. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 of the VDP 91AK132 is supplied to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The audio decoder 91AK151 decompresses and decodes compression-encoded audio data to generate an audio signal. Also, the audio processing circuit 91AK133 may include an audio data memory capable of pre-storing audio data that is not included in moving image data. The audio data memory may be provided outside the audio processing circuit 91AK133 by being included in the effect data memory 91AK123, the ROM 91AK124, or the like, for example. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 may generate an audio signal by decompressing and decoding audio data read from the audio data memory based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 91AK132.

The lamp control circuit 91AK134 controls lighting modes (light-emitting modes) such as lighting, extinguishing, and blinking of light-emitting members such as the game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs. The lamp control circuit 91AK134 generates lamp control data based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 91AK132, and outputs the data to the lamp control board 14 and the lamp driver board. The motor control circuit 91AK135 controls operating states such as rotation, stop, rotation speed, and rotation angle (phase) for the drive motor that operably drives the performance movable member such as the movable body 32 . The motor control circuit 91AK135 generates motor control data based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 132, and outputs the data to the motor driver board. The built-in memory 91AK136 is a memory circuit built in the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, and can store various data used to control the progress of the effect.

FIG. 10-2 shows a configuration example corresponding to the storage contents for the storage area for effect control. In this embodiment, storage areas 91AKM01, 91AKM02, 91AKM11 to 91AKM14 are provided as a plurality of storage areas. Each storage area may be provided so as to be included in, for example, the effect data memory 91AK123, ROM91AKM124, built-in memory 91AK136, or part or all of these. The plurality of storage areas include a storage area 91AKM11 for storing data relating to moving images and a storage area 91AKM13 for storing data relating to text images.

The storage area 91AKM01 stores a performance control program and performance control management data, and functions as a management area such as a program for performance control. For example, the CPU 91AK 131 of the production control microprocessor 91AK 100 performs various judgments, decisions, and settings. Table data, which are configuration data of various tables, pattern data constituting production control patterns, etc., are stored in a storage area as management data. It may be stored in 91AKM01.

The storage area 91AKM02 stores a display control program and display control management data, and functions as a display control program management area. For example, an image processing program prepared for the VDP 91AK 132 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK 100 to perform various image processing, a display process table defining the procedure for displaying the performance image, etc. are stored in the storage area 91AKM02. It is good if there is The image processing program may include a program for converting vector format image data into bitmap format image data. The image processing program may include a program for generating a bitmap-format text image based on text described using character codes and font data.

Storage area 91AKM11 stores moving image related data including moving image data and related data. For moving image data, image compression information including reference images and predicted images is generated by compression encoding such as motion-compensated predictive encoding using images of multiple frames that serve as original images, and multiplexed with audio data. Any multiplexed encoded stream may be used. The moving image related data stored in the storage area 91AKM11 may include table data and data files forming a moving image display process table. The moving image display process table is used for display control processing that can change the display contents and display mode of moving images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in accordance with the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the elapsed time. Used. The display content of the moving image is the content of the moving image reproduced and displayed corresponding to the moving image data. The display mode of the moving image is the mode and form of reproducing and displaying the moving image, including the display style and display layout of the moving image. Table data and data files that constitute the moving image display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

Storage area 91AKM12 stores character image related data including character image data and its related data. The character image data may be static image data in which any character image representing a plurality of kinds of decoration patterns, persons, graphics, symbols, etc. is described in vector or bitmap format. The character image-related data stored in storage area 91AKM12 may include table data and data files forming a character display process table. The character display process table is used for display control processing that can change the display contents and display mode of the character image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in accordance with the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the elapsed time. be done. The display content of the character image is the content of the character image displayed corresponding to the character image data. The display mode of the character image is the mode or form in which the character image is displayed, including the display style and display layout of the character image. Note that table data and data files forming the character display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

Storage area 91AKM13 stores text image data and text image related data including related data. The text image related data may include outline font data. Outline font data is data that can be converted to the character shape of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying a combination of multiple vertex coordinates that connect the outline for each character used to display the text image. be. The text image related data may include vector font data or stroke font data instead of or in addition to outline font data. Vector font data and stroke font data are data that can be converted into the shape of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying parameters for straight lines and curves for each character used to display a text image. . Outline fonts and vector fonts are included in scalable fonts whose quality does not easily deteriorate even when the font is enlarged or reduced. The text image data indicates a text image that constitutes a character string combining a plurality of character images, and arbitrarily set words such as sentences, paragraphs, sentences, phrases, words, or a combination of some or all of these. It is sufficient if the unit of is recognizable. Also, the text image data may indicate a text image with only a single character image. The text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 using the text image data may indicate telop characters, subtitles, other information transmission characters, and so on. It may indicate a decorative character. Since the text image data is included in the effect data for displaying the text image, it may be stored in the effect data memory 91AK123. On the other hand, font data such as outline font data is used when VDP 91AK 132 executes the image processing program, so it may be stored in either ROM 91AK 124 or built-in memory 91AK 136 . Thus, the storage area 91AKM13 may be provided in the performance data memory 91AK123, the ROM 91AK124 or the internal memory 91AK136. Similarly, other storage areas may be provided in part or all of a plurality of memory devices such as effect data memory 91AK123, ROM 91AKM124, built-in memory 91AK136.

The text image-related data stored in storage area 91AKM13 may include table data and data files that constitute a text display process table. The text display process table is used for display control processing that can change the display content and display mode of the text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 according to the elapsed time as the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 progresses. be done. The display content of the text image is the content of the text image displayed corresponding to the text image data. The display mode of the text image is the mode or form in which the character image is displayed, including the display style and display layout of the text image. The table data and data files forming the text display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

Storage area 91AKM14 stores audio related data including audio data and related data. The sound data stored in the storage area 91AKM14 is different from the sound reproduced and output in synchronization with the image in the presentation by moving image display, and can reproduce and output any sound as the presentation in the pachinko game machine 1 progresses. Anything that does. The audio-related data stored in storage area 91AKM14 may include table data and data files that constitute an audio output process table. The sound output process table is used for sound control processing that can change sounds such as sound effects and music output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the elapsed time. Table data and data files that constitute the voice output process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM01 as effect control management data.

In the VDP 91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the moving image data read from the storage area 91AKM11 is input to the demultiplexer 91AK142 and separated into video data and audio data. The video data is input to the video decoder 91AK143, and the audio data is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compression-encoded video data and supplies it to the moving image renderer 91AK144. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes conversion processing of video data according to the display mode including the display style and display layout of the moving image, for example, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. In this way, the display of the moving image is controlled using the moving image data stored in the storage area 91AKM11.

In the VDP 91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the text image data read from the storage area 91AKM13 is input to the text image renderer 91AK146. If the text image data is compression-encoded, it may be decompressed and decoded by the video decoder 91AK143 before being input to the text image renderer 91AK146. The text image renderer 91AK146 executes conversion processing of the text image data according to the display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image, for example, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. Thus, the display of the text image is controlled using the text image data stored in the storage area 91AKM13.

FIG. 10-3 shows an example of determination of moving image data and a text display process table according to contents of ready-to-win effects. In super reach effects such as SP reach A and SP reach B, effects by moving image display using moving image data and effects by text image display using text image data can be executed. The period during which the dynamic image display effect is executed and the period during which the text image display effect is executed may be partially or wholly the same period, or may include different periods. The text display process table is a table in which process data used for display control is set, for example, when displaying a text image in which a plurality of character images are combined.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 10-3, one of the moving image data 91AKD01, 91AKD02, 91AKD11, and 91AKD12 is determined, and one of the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, 91AKT11, and 91AKT12 is determined according to the content of the ready-to-win effect. be done. Among them, the moving image data is determined in one-to-one correspondence with the contents of the ready-to-win effect. For example, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP reach-to-win A (big win)", moving image data 91AKD01 is determined. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", the moving image data 91AKD02 is determined. When the content of ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (losing)", moving image data 91AKD11 is determined. When the contents of ready-to-win effect are "SP ready-to-win B (losing)", moving image data 91AKD12 is determined. On the other hand, the text display process table may or may not be determined in common for different ready-to-win effect contents. For example, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 30/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 70/100. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 20/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 80/100. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP reach A (losing)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 80/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 20/100. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP reach B (losing)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 70/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 30/100.

The text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)" or "SP reach A (loss)", and the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)" or In the case of "SP reach B (losing)", it is impossible to decide. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)" or "SP reach B (loss)", and the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)" or In the case of "SP reach A (losing)", it is impossible to decide. Thus, the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 are used to control the display of the text image when the SP reach A reach effect is executed. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 are used to control the display of text images when the SP reach B reach effect is executed.

When the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the effect is executed by moving image display using moving image data 91AKD01, and when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (losing)", a moving image. An effect by moving image display using data 91AKD11 is executed. A text image using either the text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is added to the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD11. Displayable. When the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)", the effect is executed by moving image display using moving image data 91AKD02, and when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach B (losing)", a moving image. An effect by moving image display using data 91AKD12 is executed. A text image using either text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is added to a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD02 and a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD12. Displayable. Therefore, it is possible to add and display a text image using a common text display process table to a plurality of moving images displayed using different moving image data.

FIG. 10-4 shows a configuration example of the text display process table. Of these, FIG. 10-4 (A1) shows a configuration example of a text display process table 91AKT01 that can be used in correspondence with the reach effect of SP reach A, and FIG. It shows a configuration example of a text display process table 91AKT02 that can be used corresponding to the effect. FIG. 10-4(B) shows a configuration example of a text display process table 91AKT11 that can be used in correspondence with SP reach B reach effect.

In each text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a plurality of text display periods. Note that the text display process table may include one in which text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a single text display period. The text display period designates the start time to start displaying and the end time to end the display for each text image to be displayed. The start time and end time of the text display period may be specified using the elapsed time from the start of the display of the moving image in the reach effect, or specified using the elapsed time from the start of the variable display. may However, if the display content of the text image is highly related to the display content of the moving image, the start time and end time of the text display period will be calculated using the elapsed time from the start of the display of the moving image. should be specified. Since the elapsed time after the start of the variable display includes, for example, the elapsed time before the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode, the variable display effect before the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode, etc., can be used even in the common ready-to-reach effect. may start to appear at different times. Even in such a case, if the start time and end time of the text display period are specified using the elapsed time from the start of the display of the moving image, the timing at which the specific image in the moving image is displayed, The timing at which a specific text image is displayed can be easily synchronized, and the linkage between the display of the moving image and the display of the text image can be enhanced. The text image designation information designates the text image data used for displaying the text image so as to be identifiable. For example, the text image designation information may be information that designates the storage address, readout address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13. Alternatively, the text image specification information uses arbitrary character codes such as ASCII code, UNICODE (UTF-16 or UTF-8, etc.), and JIS code (Shift_JIS code, etc.) to specify the content of the text image to be displayed. may be information specifying the The text display setting information is information that designates the display mode of the text image to be settable based on display style information, display layout information, and other metadata of the text image to be displayed. The text display process table may be described using a predetermined markup language such as TTML (Timed Text Markup Language). In addition, the text display process table may be set by using arbitrary table data so that the text image designation information and the text display setting information can be set in association with each other during the text display period.

FIG. 10-5 shows an example of text image display control using the text display process table. Of these, FIG. 10-5(A1) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, and FIG. 10-5(A2) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02. . FIG. 10-5(B) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT11. In these display control examples, when the SP reach A reach effect is executed, the display of the moving image is started at timing T00, and when the SP reach B reach effect is executed, at timing T10. The display of moving images is started at a certain time.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 10-4(A1), as shown in FIG. 10-5(A1), during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designation information 91AKA01 causes the text image specified by to be displayed. Also, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed. is displayed. Timings T02 to T04 are all included in the period from timing T01 to timing T05. After the timing T05 has passed, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA04 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T06 to the timing T08, and the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. causes the text image specified by to be displayed. Note that the timing T08 is a timing that comes after the timing T07.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 10-4(A2), as shown in FIG. 10-5(A2), during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designation information 91AKA01 causes the text image specified by to be displayed. In the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed, and in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. is displayed. After the timing T05 has passed, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA14 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T06 to the timing T08, and the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. causes the text image specified by to be displayed.

In this manner, the text image designated by the text image designation information can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in correspondence with a plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table. The first text display period included in the plurality of text display periods may include a second text display period different from the first text display period and a period partially or wholly common to the second text display period. For example, in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, and the second text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. It is set to include 3 text display periods. In this case, part of the first text display period is shared with the second text display period, and part of the other period is shared with the third text display period. Thus, the first text display period includes a period partially common to the second text display period, and includes a period partially common to the third text display period. On the other hand, the entire period of the second text display period is in common with the first text display period, and the entire period of the third text display period is in common with the first text display period. Thus, the second text display period is entirely included in the first text display period, and the third text display period is entirely included in the first text display period. Further, the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08 and the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09 include periods that are partially common to each other. Thus, the first text display period may be partially included in the second text display period, and the second text display period may be partially included in the first text display period. Alternatively, the first text display period may be entirely included in the second text display period, and the second text display period may be entirely included in the first text display period.

By setting in the text display process table, different text images designated by the text image designation information can be displayed according to a plurality of text display periods. As a result, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, it is possible to change the first component related to the display content of the text image among the plurality of components in the display of the text image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed during the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05 by setting in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02. As the second text display period included in the first text display period, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. After the second text display period ends at timing T03, as a third text display period included in the first text display period, the text image designation information 91AKA03 or the text A text image designated by the image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. With this setting, only the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed during the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and the period from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period. . On the other hand, of the first text display period, during the period from timing T02 to timing T03, which is common to the second text display period, the first text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed. The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the second text image specified by the information 91AKA02 is added. On the other hand, during the period from timing T04 to timing T05 common to the third text display period in the first text display period, the first text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed with the text image designation information The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the third text image designated by 91AKA03 or the display of the fourth text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is added. In this case, the display of the text image added to the display of the first text image is set so that either the third text image or the fourth text image is displayed according to the determination result of the text display process table. It becomes possible to change.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the common text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, and the text from timing T02 to timing T03 is displayed. The text image designated by the common text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed during the display period. On the other hand, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed, and in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image is displayed. The text image designated by the image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. The text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02 can be determined corresponding to common moving image data 91AKD01 and 91AKD11. Therefore, even when a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, the text images to be displayed are different in at least a part of a plurality of text display periods. Components can be changed. It should be noted that when a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, the text image as the display mode may be changed in all of the plurality of text display periods according to the determination result of the text display process table. good. When moving images using common moving image data are displayed, part or all of the start time, end time, and period length may be different for a plurality of text display periods according to the determination result of the text display process table. You can let In this way, part or all of the display period for displaying the text image added to one moving image may be changed, or part or all of the text image added to one moving image may be changed. may be

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 10-4(B), as shown in FIG. 10-5(B), during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15, the text image designation information 91AKA21 causes the text image specified by to be displayed. Also, during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T12, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T13 to timing T14, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA23 is displayed. is displayed. Timings T12 to T14 are all included in the period from timing T11 to timing T15. After the timing T15 has passed, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA24 is displayed during the text display period from timing T16 to timing T17, and the text image designation information 91AKA25 is displayed during the text display period from timing T18 to timing T19. causes the text image specified by to be displayed.

FIG. 10-6 shows a specific example of text display setting information. The text display setting information includes data corresponding to multiple fields such as origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration. The origin field can set the origin coordinates when displaying a text image. The fontFamily field can set the font family, which is the font type, for the font of the characters included in the text image. The fontSize field can set the font size that is the size for displaying the text image. The fontWeight field can set the thickness of characters included in the text image. The color field can set the display color of characters included in the text image. The backgroundColor field can set the display color of the background in the text image. The fontStyle field allows you to set the style of the characters in the text image, such as normal, italic, or italic. The textAlign field can set the alignment of characters included in the text image, such as right alignment, center alignment, and left alignment. The textDecoration field can set decorations to be added to the text image, such as underline, overline, strikethrough, and other effect images. In this way, the text display setting information makes it possible to set the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

FIG. 10-6(A) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB01. FIG. 10-6(B) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB02. FIG. 10-6 (C1) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB03. FIG. 10-6 (C2) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB13. Text display setting information 91AKB01 is included in text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. Text display setting information 91AKB02 is included in text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. Text display setting information 91AKB03 is included in text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11, but not included in text display process table 91AKT02. The text display setting information 91AKB13 is included in the text display process table 91AKT02, but not included in the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11.

In a plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table, the text image designated by the text image designation information is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. can be displayed. Thereby, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, it is possible to change the second component related to the display mode of the text image among the plurality of components in displaying the text image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, according to the settings in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. displayed in the specified display style and display layout. As the second text display period included in the first text display period, in the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. Displayed in a display style or display layout. After the second text display period ends at timing T03, the third text display period included in the first text display period is designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. The text image specified by the text display setting information 91AKB03 is displayed in the display style or display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, and the text image specified by the text image specifying information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display style set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. or display layout. With this setting, only the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed as text during the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and the period from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period. It is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the setting information 91AKB01. On the other hand, during the period from timing T02 to timing T03 common to the second text display period in the first text display period, the text image is added to the display of the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the text image designated by the designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. On the other hand, during the period from timing T04 to timing T05 common to the third text display period in the first text display period, the text image designation is added to the display of the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. When the text image designated by the information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, and when the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed by the text display setting information 91AKB13. The display of the text image is changed so that it may be displayed in the specified display style or display layout.

In the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display setting information 91AKB02, unlike the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. can be displayed in the display style and display layout set by In the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the text display setting information 91AKB03, unlike the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. may be displayed in the display style or display layout set by Alternatively, in the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the text display setting information, unlike the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. It may be displayed in the display style or display layout set by the information 91AKB13. In this way, during the period common to the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03 in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed as the first text display period. 1 display mode, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 can be displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode. Of the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, during the period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed in the first display mode. Along with the display, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 may be displayed in a third display mode different from the first display mode and the second display mode. Alternatively, during the period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05 in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is first displayed. In addition, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 may be displayed in a fourth display mode different from the first to third display modes. Therefore, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, some of the text images can be displayed in a display mode different from that of the other text images. Further, after displaying the text image in the second display mode together with the text image in the first display mode, the text image in the second display mode is changed to the text image in the third display mode, and the second display mode is displayed. The display mode of the text image can be changed and displayed, such that the text image of the mode may be changed to the text image of the fourth display mode.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 10-4(A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 10-4(A2), during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image The text image designated by the designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. Also, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. Thereby, a common text image can be displayed in a common display mode. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03 corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. display. In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13 corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. This allows different text images to be displayed in different display modes. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT11, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 corresponding to the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. display. Also, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponding to the text display period from timing T11 to timing T12. In this case, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 can be displayed in a common display mode with the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. Also, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 can be displayed in a common display mode with the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02. In this manner, even different text images added to different moving images may be displayed in a common display mode according to setting data based on common text display setting information. Alternatively, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB05 corresponding to the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. Let In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB15 corresponding to the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. In this manner, even a common text image may be displayed in different display modes according to the text display setting information.

In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a plurality of text display periods. Further, in a plurality of text display process tables, at least part of the text image designation information and text display setting information set in association with a plurality of text display periods can be set as common information, and , part or all of the information can be set as different information. With these settings, the first component and the second component related to the text image, such as the display content and display mode of the text image, can be individually changed and displayed.

In the text display setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 10-6(A), the color field is set so that the display color of the text image changes stepwise from #FF0040 to #4000FF. In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 10-4(A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 10-4(A2), during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, text display A text image is displayed in the display mode set by the setting information 91AKB01. In the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 10-4(B), the text image is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. In these cases, when the text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed as a text image corresponding to the display content that is the common first component in the corresponding text display period, The display mode, which is the second component of the text image, such as the display color of the text image, can be changed according to the elapsed time. Note that the display color of the text image set by the color field, for example, may be changeable according to the contents of the ready-to-win effect, etc., even when the same text image is specified by the text image specification information. . In this case, whether or not the display color of the text image is changed at a different rate depending on whether or not the control is in an advantageous state, such as whether or not the display result of the variable display is a "big hit". It may be determined, or one of a plurality of display colors may be determined. Further, for example, the display color of the text image set by the color field is changed according to the execution result of the effect control program by the CPU 91AK 131 even if the same text image is specified by the text image specification information. It may be possible. In this case, the VDP 91AK 132 should be able to change the display color of the text image set by the color field to a different display color based on the display control command from the CPU 91AK 131, register settings, and the like. In this way, the display mode such as the display style of the text image can be changed only by changing a part of the data related to the text image contained in the text display process table. , it is possible to display various text images. If the display color of the text image is changed, other display styles may be correspondingly changeable. For example, when the display color of the text image is white, the display of the text image becomes easy for the player to visually recognize, and when the display color of the text image is red, the display of the text image becomes difficult for the player to recognize. Tend. Therefore, when the display color of the text image is changed to red, the text image set by the fontSize field, for example, is displayed so that the font size is larger than when the display color of the text image is white. The size may be changed. As a specific example, a text image displayed with a font size of 10.5px when the display color is white will be displayed with a font size of 11px when the display color is changed to red. It would be nice if it could be changed to As a result, it is possible to display a text image that is easy for the player to visually recognize while suppressing the player's sense of discomfort in displaying the text image.

FIG. 10-7 shows an execution example of rendering in which a text image is displayed using the text display process table. In this execution example, text images corresponding to a plurality of text display periods are displayed along with the moving image display when the reach performance of SP reach A is executed. In the reach performance of the SP reach A, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", a moving image is displayed using the moving image data 91AKD01, and when the display result of the variable display is "losing", a moving image is displayed. Moving image display using data 91AKD11 is performed. In the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD11, a common effect display is performed in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight against each other. It is sufficient that the content of the effect display is common until the timing of notification. Further, when the display result of the variable display is "big win", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is high, and when the display result of the variable display is "losing", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is increased. becomes higher. Therefore, in the ready-to-win performance of the SP reach-A, even during the moving image display period in which the contents of the common performance display are displayed, the degree of expectation for the big win can be varied according to the display contents of the text image according to the text display process table. can be done.

Effect execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 10-7(A) is effect content common to text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, and text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed corresponding to the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. In this case, the text image indicating the reach name "SP reach A" designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 has, for example, origin coordinates of (300, 30), The font family is AA_gothic, which is classified as a gothic typeface, the font size is 48px, the bold line width corresponds to the bold character thickness, and the display color of the text image gradually changes from #FF0040 to #4000FF. The components in the display of the text image are controlled so that the background display color is #CCF0F0, the character style is italic or italic corresponding to italic, the character placement is centered, and the character decoration is not set. In the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, if the text image renderer 91AK146 of the VDP 91AK132 executes image conversion processing for displaying the text image in a display mode including the display style and display layout specified by the text display specification information. good.

In the effect execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 10-7(A), the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 corresponds to the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03. It is displayed in the display mode set by In this case, the text image indicating the line "If this character wins..." specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02, for example, with origin coordinates of (250, 600 ), the font family is BB_mincho, which is classified as a Mincho typeface, the font size is 36px, the normal line width corresponding to the normal character thickness, the display color of the text image is #FFFFFF, and the background display color is #220C0C. , normal typeface corresponding to normal for the character style, left-aligned character alignment, and no character decoration.

Effect execution example 91AKD21 shown in FIG. 10-7(B1) includes effect contents different from text display process table 91AKT02 when text display process table 91AKT01 is used, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, Correspondingly, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03. In this case, the text image indicating the line "chance!!" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, for example, the origin coordinates are (250,600) and the font family is CC_gothic typeface classified as Gothic, font size 60px, normal line width corresponding to normal character thickness, text image display color #000000, background display color #FFFFFF, character style normal The constituent elements in the text image are controlled so that the corresponding normal typeface, character placement is centered, and character decoration is not set. This text image has the same origin coordinates and character decoration as the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02, and has the same font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, and background display. Colors, character styles, and character alignment have been changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, it may be possible to change and display some of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information. .

Effect execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 10-7 (B2) includes effect contents different from text display process table 91AKT01 when text display process table 91AKT02 is used, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05 Correspondingly, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. In this case, the text image indicating the line "Gekiatsu" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 has, for example, the origin coordinates of (250,600) and the font family of DD_mincho as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. The font size is 72px, the bold line width corresponds to bold, the display color of the text image is gold corresponding to "gold", the background display color is #000000, The constituent elements in the text image are controlled so that the character style is normal body corresponding to normal, the character placement is in the center, and the character decoration is effect display settings for gold display by effect_gold. Compared with the text image specified by the text image specifying information 91AKA02, this text image has only the origin coordinates in common, and has font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, background display color, Character styles, character alignments, and character decorations have been changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, the data to be changed and the data not to be changed among the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information are individually set. It may be possible. When this text image is compared with the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01, all settings including the origin coordinates have been changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specifying information, it may be possible to change and display all of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information. When displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, among the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information, if one data is changed and displayed, the first data and the Other pre-associated data may also be changeable and displayable. For example, if the display color of the text image is changed to gold corresponding to "gold", the character decoration should be changed to the effect display setting for gold display by effect_gold.

The display color of the text image and the background display color are, for each display color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue), luminance (gradation) of any one of "0" to "255". The level can be set in 256 stages. In the text display setting information, the field data forming the color field and the backgroundColor field have the same data format as the field data forming the color field and the backgroundColor field in the character display setting information used for displaying character images, for example. It is good if there is The coordinates of the origin for displaying the text image can be set by combining the x-coordinate in the horizontal direction and the y-coordinate in the vertical direction on the screen of the image display device 5 . In the text display setting information, the field data forming the origin field may have a data format common to that of the field data forming the origin field in the character display setting information, for example. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information is common to the field data included in the setting information used to display the effect image different from the text image, such as the character display setting information. may have a format. With such text display setting information, it is sufficient if the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, can be changed using common information with the effect image that is different from the text image. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load of changing the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

A font family that can be set when displaying a text image is not set when displaying a character image. In the text display setting information, the field data forming the fontFamily field may be unique field data not included in the character display setting information. Also, instead of the font size that can be set when displaying a text image, it is sufficient if the character size can be set when displaying a character image. The field data forming the fontSize field in the text display setting information corresponds to the field data forming the characterSize field in the character display setting information, but may have a unique field format. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information is unique and different from the field data included in the setting information used to display the effect image different from the text image, such as the character display setting information. It may have a data format. With such text display setting information, it is possible to change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, using unique information that is not used in the effect image that is different from the text image. good too. This makes it possible to flexibly change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, and display various text images.

For example, when gold corresponding to "gold" is set as the display color of the text image, the character decoration is effect display setting for gold display by effect_gold. In the text display setting information, when "gold" is set in the color field, by setting effect_gold in the textDecoration field, a glossy text image is displayed and gold is displayed around the text image. It is possible to add and display an effect image for In the effect execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 10-7(B2), when the text image designation information 91A13 designates a specific text image showing the line "Super Hot", the text display setting information 91AKB13 is used for gold display. By setting the display style, etc., the specific text image showing the line "Super hot" is displayed with glossiness, and the effect image for gold display is displayed around the specific text image. . This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the display of the text image and to improve the interest of the presentation by the display of the text image.

In the pachinko game machine 1, when an effect by moving image display using moving image data is executed, by adding an effect by text image display using text image data, the player can easily recognize the contents of the effect. This makes it easy to provide information that is different from the contents of the presentation. In this case, in a data structure in which text image data is compression-encoded and multiplexed as video data included in moving image data, in text image display using text image data reproduced by decompression and decoding, contours There is a possibility that problems such as blurring and deterioration of display quality may occur. In addition, if different moving image data are prepared according to the display contents of the text image display added to the moving image display, the data volume of the moving image data tends to increase, and the image data processing load also increases. easier. If a special compression encoding process or decompression decoding process is executed in order to prevent the display quality from deteriorating in text image display, the image data processing load may increase further.

In the characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK, when an effect by moving image display using the moving image data read out from the storage area 91AKM11 is executed, an effect by text image display using the text image data read out from the storage area 91AKM13 is added. By doing so, various text image displays can be easily executed with high quality, and the player can easily recognize the contents of the presentation. In addition, since the text image display using the text image data stored separately from the moving image data is added, an increase in the data volume of the moving image data and an increase in the processing load of the image data are avoided. , it is possible to control the appropriate display that can be prevented as much as possible.

A text image display added to a moving image display using moving image data is controlled using a text display process table. Similarly, moving image display is controlled using a moving image display process table, character image display is controlled using a character display process table, and audio output is controlled using audio output process data. In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a plurality of text display periods. The text image designation information designates the display content of the text image corresponding to the text image data as the first component related to the text image. The text display setting information sets the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, as a second component related to the text image. In the VDP 91AK 132 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK 100, for example, the text image renderer 91AK 146 displays the text image specified by the text image specification information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. It is possible to execute image conversion processing for the purpose. As a result, during the display period of the text image added to one moving image, the display content of the text image as the first component and the display mode of the text image as the second component can be changed according to the elapsed time. Make it changeable. By making it possible to change the first component and the second component related to the text image added to one moving image, it is possible to display various text images easily and with high quality, and at the same time reduce data capacity and processing load. Appropriate display control is enabled so that growth is prevented.

When the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", either text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is used when the moving image display effect using moving image data 91AKD01 is executed. A text image can be added and displayed. When the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (losing)", either of the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 is used when the moving image display effect using the moving image data 91AKD11 is executed. A text image can be added and displayed. Further, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", either of the text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 is executed when the moving image display effect using the moving image data 91AKD02 is executed. The used text image can be added and displayed. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP reach B (losing)", either text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is used when the moving image display effect using the moving image data 91AKD12 is executed. A text image can be added and displayed. In this way, it is possible to add and display a text image using data relating to a common text image, such as a common text display process table, for a plurality of moving images that are different from each other. By adding text images using common data to multiple moving images and displaying them, various text images can be displayed easily and with high quality, while preventing increases in data volume and processing load. Appropriate display control becomes possible.

In the text display process table 91AKT02, a plurality of text images showing the words "hot" are displayed according to the text image specification information 91AKA13 and the text display setting information 91AKB13 set in association with the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. The display style or the like may be displayed so as to be changeable at the timing of . The text image showing the line "Super hot" is a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image that is a display content that suggests that the display result of the variable display is likely to be a "big hit". Any text image is acceptable. Thus, when displaying a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group, the second component such as the display mode of the specific text image may be changed at multiple timings.

FIG. 10-8 shows an example of display control when the display style of a text image showing the words "hot" can be changed at a plurality of timings. In this display control example, of the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the display color is black and the character decoration is not set during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041, and the text from timing T041 to timing T042 is displayed in black. During the display period, the display color is gold and character decoration is not set, and in the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05, the display color is gold and the character decoration is effect display setting for gold display. As for the display style of the text image that is common to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the font family is DD_mincho in the fontFamily field and the font size is 72px in the fontSize field. is set.

FIG. 10-8(A) shows a case where a text image with the words "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to black corresponding to #000000, and the textDecoration field sets the character decoration to no setting corresponding to none. As a result, the display mode including the display style is controlled such that the text image showing the line "Super hot" is displayed in black and the character decoration is not set.

FIG. 10-8(B) shows a case in which a text image with the words "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T041 to timing T042. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to gold corresponding to "gold", and the textDecoration field sets the character decoration to no setting corresponding to none. As a result, the display mode including the display style is controlled so that the display color of the text image showing the words "hot" is gold and the character decoration is not set. When the display color of the text image is set to gold, it is possible to display the text image with glossiness by, for example, gradation display of the text image. However, if the display of the text image is only glossy, it may be difficult for the player to recognize the gold display.

FIG. 10-8(C) shows a case in which a text image with the words "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to gold corresponding to "gold", and the textDecoration field sets the effect display setting for gold display corresponding to the text decoration effect_gold. be done. As a result, the display mode including the display style is controlled so that the text image showing the line "Super hot" is displayed in gold and the character decoration is set to the effect display setting for gold display. In addition to setting the display color of the text image to gold, if the character decoration of the text image is set to the effect display setting for gold display, in addition to the gradation display of the text image, for example, the border of the text image It is possible to display an effect image around the text image by using the display color of , shading, border display by beveling or embossing, a layer style that adds luster, or a combination of some or all of these. As a result, in addition to the display of the text image having glossiness, the effect image is added around the text image and displayed, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize the gold display, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize the display of the text image. It can improve the impression of people.

In the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, a part of the text image is separated from the other part by the text image specification information 91AKA02 and the text display setting information 91AKB02 set in association with the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. It may be displayed in a different display style. The text image designation information 91AKA02 designates a text image of the line "If this character wins...". The text display setting information 91AKB02 sets a part of the text image "character" out of the text information indicating the line "if this character wins..." to a different display color and background display of the text image from the other parts. All you have to do is set the color and character style.

FIG. 10-9 shows a display example in which a portion of the text image is displayed in a display style different from that of the other portions. In this display example, part of the text image "character" is displayed in white, the background color is black, and the character style is italic, while the other part of the text image is displayed in black. It is displayed so that the background display color is white and the character style is normal. The text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponds to a portion of the text image "character". Set the italic corresponding to the character style italic by the fontStyle field respectively. In addition, the text display setting information 91AKB02 has black corresponding to #000000 for the display color of the text image by the color field, white corresponding to #FFFFFF for the background display color, and white corresponding to #FFFFFF by the fontStyle field. Set the normal type corresponding to the character style normal, respectively. Thus, by displaying a portion of the text image in a display style different from that of the other portions, it is possible to enhance the player's impression of the display of the text image.

In the display of a text image that constitutes a character string in which a plurality of character images are combined, a portion displayed in a display style different from that of other portions may be changeable according to the progress of presentation by moving image display. For example, when a piece of music or dialogue is played back along with a moving image, a portion of the text image corresponding to the progress is displayed in a display style different from that of the other portions, such as a specific color display or highlight display. You may let It may be possible to change the display style so that a part of the text image is faded-in or faded-out according to the progress of the music performance or speech reproduction. A portion of the text image displayed in a display style different from that of other portions is changed according to the elapsed time during the execution of an arbitrary effect, not limited to situations in which the music is played or the voice of dialogue is played along with the moving image display. It may be possible. As a result, in the display of the text image, a part displayed in a display style different from that of the other parts is changed in accordance with the progress of the performance, so that the player's impression of the display of the text image can be enhanced.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and in order to solve at least one problem in the prior art, It may be provided with a part of the configuration.

As a specific example, during the display period of the text image added to one moving image, the display content of the text image that is the first component and the display mode of the text image that is the second component are set to the elapsed time, etc. Execute one of the following: display control to enable change according to the situation, or display control to enable display by adding a text image using data related to a common text image to a plurality of moving images. It may be one that does not execute the other. The first component and the second component related to the text image may be able to change arbitrary components, for example, regarding the display content and display mode of the text image. Instead of part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image, or in addition to part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image, any component related to the display of the text image can be changed. may For example, the time interval and movement width for updating the display position when moving and displaying a text image, the enlargement ratio and reduction ratio when displaying an enlarged or reduced text image, these enlargement ratios and reduction ratios depending on the elapsed time It is only necessary to be able to change arbitrary components that can be set for the display of the text image, such as the time interval for updating the enlargement ratio or the reduction ratio and the amount of change when the text image is changed.

When displaying a text image corresponding to the common display content, the display mode of the text image is changed by changing the text image setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 10-6(A). It is not limited to changing the display color, and any display mode such as display style or display layout may be changed. For example, the text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 can be displayed in the corresponding text display period instead of the display color of the text image, or in addition to the display color of the text image. Any display mode such as font size, character thickness, background display color, character style, character arrangement, decorative display, or a combination of some or all of these may be changed. The text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information different from the text display setting information 91AKB01 may be changeable to a display mode different from the display mode of the text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. .

The text image data is not limited to the data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 as data different from the moving image data, and at least a part of the text image data may be included in the moving image data. For example, text image data for displaying highly designed characters, such as cursive or cursive, is multiplexed or compression-encoded as part of video data, and the video data separated from this video data is decompressed. It may be possible to display the text image in a particular manner, such as by decoding. In this case, the data regarding the text image of the specific mode is included in the moving image data and stored in storage area 91AKM11. In this way, the text image related data includes the specific text image related data included in the moving image data and stored in storage area 91AKM11, and the normal text image related data stored in storage area 91AKM13. may

The text display setting information included in the text display process table consists of field data corresponding to part of origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration as data corresponding to multiple fields. Alternatively, it may be configured to include field data different from these. For example, when specifying the storage address, read address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13 by the text image specifying information, the text image data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 is read without using the font data. , the corresponding text image can be displayed. In this case, the text display setting information does not need field data related to font settings, so it may be configured without including field data related to font settings such as fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, and fontStyle. On the other hand, in this case, in order to set the display size of the text image, the text display setting information may be configured to include separate field data relating to text display settings, such as textSize.

Scalable font data such as outline font data and vector font data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 may be prepared only as data corresponding to text images used in display effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or may be, for example, general-purpose Japanese font data. Data corresponding to text images that are not limited to text images used in display effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as word font data, may be prepared. When only the font data corresponding to the text image used in the display effect is stored in the storage area 91AKM13, the increase in data capacity can be prevented when the text image used in the display effect is small. If general-purpose font data corresponding to text images that are not limited to text images used in display effects are stored in the storage area 91AKM13, reuse of the font data will be facilitated, so designing effects for displaying text images. It is possible to reduce the burden, and to prevent an increase in data capacity when a large amount of text images are used in display effects.

As a second component related to the text image, the specific text image, which can change the display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image at multiple timings, is not limited to the text image showing the line "Super hot" , any text image preset as a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group. For example, among a plurality of types of text images, text images prepared in advance for displaying lyrics of music and text images prepared in advance for displaying subtitles of moving images may be used as specific text images. In this way, for specific text images corresponding to audio effects and display effects in which the effect content changes according to the elapsed time, such as the playback output of music and the playback display of moving images, the second component such as the display mode is set in a plurality of ways. It may be changeable with timing. Alternatively, a text image for which a specific display mode is set, such as a text image for rainbow display in which the display color of the text image is rainbow colors, or a text image for motif display in which the pattern or character decoration of the text image is a cherry blossom pattern. may be the specific text image. Alternatively, it is not limited to the text image of the display content that suggests that the display result of the variable display is highly likely to be a "jackpot", but the text image of the display content that suggests that the rate of being controlled to an arbitrary advantageous state is high. may be the specific text image. The advantageous state is not limited to the jackpot game state, and may include a special game state such as a time saving state or a variable probability state. In addition, the upper limit number of round games that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the first round number (for example, "15") that is larger than the second round number (for example, "7"), and it is executable in the time saving state. The upper limit number of times of variable display is the first number (for example, "100") that is higher than the second number (for example, "50"), and the jackpot probability in the variable state is the second probability (for example, 1/50). 1 probability (for example, 1/20), and the number of consecutive chances, which is the number of times repeatedly controlled to the jackpot game state without being controlled to the normal state, is greater than the second consecutive chance number (for example, "5"). It may include a game situation that is more advantageous to the player, such as a part or all of the number of consecutive wins (for example, "10").

A glossy text image is not limited to the case where gold corresponding to "gold" is set as the display color of the text image. may include a case where the display color of is set. The display color of the text image is not limited, and when a preset specific text image is displayed, the specific text image may be displayed in a glossy display mode. When displaying an arbitrary text image with glossiness, settings such as the textDecoration field in the text display setting information should be made so that it can be displayed with an effect image added around the text image. Just do it.

When a text image is displayed in a rainbow, a plurality of display colors may be sequentially changed and displayed within a predetermined range such as coordinates in characters and display time in the display of the text image. For example, if the display color of the text image is set to a rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" in the color field in the text display setting information, by transitioning different display colors for each coordinate in the character of the text image. , rainbow display should be possible. For example, at the coordinates in the character 1, the display color is changed to red, then orange to yellow, then green, then light blue, then blue, and then blue purple to red purple, depending on the elapsed time. In addition, a plurality of display colors may be sequentially changed. At this time, considering the fact that red is a color that gives a strong impression to the human eye and that the change in blue becomes darker, we adjusted the brightness corresponding to each display color in the rainbow display, and The display colors in the coordinates within the character may be changed in order of red, orange, yellow, green, water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple. After purplish-red, it is sufficient to return to red again and change the display color. As a result, the player can smoothly and clearly recognize the change in display color. In this way, when a special element is set as a character image component, such as when the display color of the text image is set to a rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" by the color field in the text display setting information, the text display process Even if it is possible to display a text image in which multiple display colors are sequentially changed within the text image coordinates and display time range specified by the text image specification information corresponding to the text display period included in the table. good. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the display of the text image and to improve the interest of the presentation by the display of the text image. By sequentially changing different display colors according to the coordinates in the text image, the entire text image may be displayed in a rainbow display. Alternatively, by sequentially changing the common display color for all in-character coordinates, the display of the text image may be changed to a rainbow display according to the elapsed time. In this manner, a text image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed may be displayed within a predetermined range of either the intra-character coordinates or the display time.

The first component and the second component related to the text image may be changeable to different components depending on whether the player's specific action is detected, or the plurality of components may be changed at different ratios. Either can be changed. The player's specific action that enables the change of the first component and the second component related to the text image is, for example, a push operation or a pull operation on the operating rod of the stick controller 31A, which is the V controller, or other operations of the V stick controller 31A. An arbitrary motion of tilting the rod or a motion of pressing the push button 31b may be used. Not limited to those that can detect player's actions, for example, based on the detection result of any change or difference in the detection target, such as the execution state of processing or control in the detection target, changes in the shape, pattern, or color of the detection target It may be possible to change the first component and the second component related to the text image. A detection device capable of detecting motion, change, difference, etc. in a detection target, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, mechanically, electrically, electromagnetically detects the state of the detection target. Any configuration that can be detected will suffice. Alternatively, the state of the detection target may be detected by analyzing the result of photographing the detection target using a predetermined camera (video motion capture). As an example of detecting the state of a detection target using a camera, the screen display state of the mobile terminal may be detected, and the display content and display mode of the text image may be changed based on the detection result.

Some or all of the text image display effects using the text image data may be executed as setting suggesting effects capable of suggesting setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . For example, when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 may be determined at different ratios depending on the set values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In such a case, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 35/100 (=35%) if the set value is 1, and 30/100 (=30%) if the set value is 2. If the setting value is 3, it is 25/100 (=25%), if the setting value is 4, it is 20/100 (=20%), and if the setting value is 5, it is 15/100 (= 15%), and if the set value is 6, it may be set to 10/100 (=10%). Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 65/100 (=65%) if the set value is 1, and 70/100 (=70%) if the set value is 2. If the setting value is 3, it is 75/100 (=75%), if the setting value is 4, it is 80/100 (=80%), and if the setting value is 5, it is 85/100 (= 85%), and if the set value is 6, it may be set to 90/100 (=90%). According to the setting of such determination ratio, when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the ratio at which the effect by text image display corresponding to either text display process pattern 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is executed. are made different according to the set values in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, when the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the effect by the text image display according to the text display process table 91AKT01 is likely to be executed, and as the set value increases, the text according to the text display process table 91AKT02 is displayed. The ratio of execution of effects by image display increases. Therefore, when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)", and the effect by the text image display according to the text display process table 91AKT02 is executed, the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is advantageous for the player. The expectation level, which is a set value, increases.

In addition, according to the set value in the pachinko game machine 1, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios. For example, in the case of a specific set value, setting suggestion effects may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of a set value other than the specific set value. In this case, in a range where the set value is other than the specific set value, there is provided a limit as a limit that the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range where the set value is the specific set value. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate when the specific set value is set and is not executed when the set value is other than the specific set value. In this manner, within a range where the set value is the specific set value, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, a limitation is provided as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed in a range where the set value is other than the specific set value.

Depending on whether it is a special period or not, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios. For example, in the case of the special period, it may be possible to execute the setting suggestion effect at a higher rate than in the case of the period other than the special period. In this case, in a period other than the special period, a limitation is provided as a limit that the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the special period. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate in the special period and is not executed in the period other than the special period. In this way, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect at a predetermined rate within the special period. On the other hand, within a period other than the special period, there is a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

Depending on whether or not an arbitrary special condition is satisfied, regardless of whether it is a special period or not, arbitrary setting suggestion effects may be executed at different ratios. For example, when the special condition is established, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the special condition is not established. In this case, in the range where the special condition is not satisfied, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range where the special condition is satisfied. A setting suggestion performance may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate when the special condition is met and is not executed when the special condition is not met. In this way, within the range where the special condition is satisfied, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, in the range in which the special condition is not established, there is provided a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed. The special condition may be any condition that can be established according to the progress or history of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the result of judgment or decision of the game, or the progress or history of the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the performance. It may be any condition that can be established according to the determination or determination of. It is not limited to setting suggesting effects, and arbitrary effects may be executable at different rates depending on whether or not a preset condition is met, or whether such a condition is met. The effect mode may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not the condition is satisfied, or the execution timing may be determined at a different rate depending on whether such a condition is satisfied. . In addition, an arbitrary effect may be limited as a limit that a specific effect is not executed in the range where the preset limit condition is satisfied, or compared with the range where the limit condition is not satisfied. A limit may be provided as a limit that the execution rate is lowered and execution is difficult.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 91AK)
A game machine capable of executing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 1, capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image with a character image added, such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B, For example, effect execution means such as the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, a first storage area such as a storage area 91AKM11 for storing data related to moving images, and a second storage area such as a storage area 91AKM13 for storing data related to character images. and moving image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a moving image renderer 91AK144, for controlling the display of moving images using the data stored in the first storage area, and character image display using the data stored in the second storage area. Character image control means such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146 are provided for controlling display, and the data stored in the second storage area is the first component such as the text image specified by the text image specification information. and a second component such as a display style set by text display setting information. During the display period, the first component and the second component can be changed, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-7. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10-8, the character image control means can change the second component related to the character image when displaying the character image corresponding to the common first component during the display period. good too. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means changes the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. It may be possible. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means is capable of displaying a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image showing "Gekiatsu", for example. The second component may be changeable at multiple timings. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means may be capable of individually changing and displaying the first component and the second component relating to the character image, as shown in FIG. 10-4, for example. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The data stored in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used to display character images, such as outline font data. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

When a specific element such as when the color field is "gold" is set as a character image component, for example, as shown in FIG. It may be possible to add an effect image to the surroundings and display it. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

When a special element such as "rainbow" is set in the color field as a character image component, for example, red, orange, yellow, green, red, orange, yellow, green, etc. It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as changing in order of water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 92AK)
A game machine capable of executing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 1, capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image with a character image added, such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B, For example, effect execution means such as the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, a first storage area such as a storage area 91AKM11 for storing data related to moving images, and a second storage area such as a storage area 91AKM13 for storing data related to character images. and moving image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a moving image renderer 91AK144, for controlling the display of moving images using the data stored in the first storage area, and character image display using the data stored in the second storage area. Character image control means such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146 are provided for controlling display, and the data stored in the second storage area is the first component such as the text image specified by the text image specification information. and a second component such as a display style set by the text display setting information. and a second moving image different from the first moving image, such as a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD11, for example, a text image according to the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02. , a character image using data relating to a common character image can be added and displayed. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10-8, the character image control means, when displaying the character image corresponding to the common first component during the display period of the character image added to one moving image, controls the character image may be changeable. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means changes the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. It may be possible. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means is capable of displaying a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image showing "Gekiatsu", for example. The second component may be changeable at multiple times. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means may be capable of individually changing and displaying the first component and the second component relating to the character image, as shown in FIG. 10-4, for example. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The data stored in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used to display character images, such as outline font data. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

When a specific element such as when the color field is "gold" is set as a character image component, for example, as shown in FIG. It may be possible to add an effect image to the surroundings and display it. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

When a special element such as "rainbow" is set in the color field as a character image component, for example, red, orange, yellow, green, red, orange, yellow, green, etc. It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as changing in order of water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

(Explanation related to association of characteristic parts)
The configuration regarding the characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK may be appropriately combined with part or all of the configuration regarding the characteristic portion 60AK. For example, an operation effect to be executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed can be executed as a setting suggestion effect, which is an operation effect of the suggestion effect mode, and during the display period of the character image added to one moving image, the first component and the second component may be changeable, and character images using common character image data for the first moving image and the second moving image different from the first moving image may be changed. It may be possible to add and display.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiments and other examples of forms described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention.

Further, all or part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention also includes a gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player. Effect executing means (for example, effect control microprocessor 91AK100, etc.) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B, etc.) for displaying a moving image to which an image is added, and data related to the moving image. A first storage area (for example, storage area 91AKM11) for storing, a second storage area (for example, storage area 91AKM13) for storing data relating to character images, and display of moving images using the data in the first storage area. Controlling moving image control means (for example, video decoder 91AK143, moving image renderer 91AK144, etc.); 91AK146, etc.), and the data in the second storage area includes a first component (for example, a text image specified by text image specification information) and a second component (for example, set by text display setting information) display style, etc.), and the character image control means controls, in the display period of the character image added to one moving image, the first component and the second component. can be changed (see, for example, FIG. 10-7), and using information common to a specific image different from the character image (for example, field data constituting the color field), the second component related to the character image It is changeable (see, for example, FIG. 10-6), and can display detection means (for example, stick controller 31A, controller sensor unit 35A, etc.) capable of detecting player's actions, and specific display corresponding to variable display. Specific display means (for example, active display area 87AKA1, first reservation display area 87AKB1, second reservation display area 87AKB2, etc.) and promotion effect execution means (for example, during variable display Effect control CPU 120 for executing step 87AKS051 of effect processing, etc.) and action effect execution means capable of executing action effect based on the detection result of the detection means (for example, effect control to execute step 87AKS053 of effect process during variable display CPU 120 for display, etc.) and predetermined effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing step 87AKS049 of effect processing during variable display) capable of executing a predetermined effect during execution of variable display, and the specific display means , the specific display can be displayed in any one of a plurality of display modes (eg, display colors corresponding to the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4) including a specific mode (eg, red display using the display image 87AKC4), and The promotion effect execution means uses one of a plurality of effect modes (such as the size of the V-con display according to the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3) including a special mode (for example, a large V-con display using the display image 87AKF3). The promotion effect can be executed, and the predetermined effect execution means can perform a predetermined mode (for example, a display image 87AKE3 of "Gekiatsu! ! , etc.) (for example, messages corresponding to the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3). , the predetermined effect is executed in the predetermined mode (see, for example, the cut-in effect decision example 87AK41 in FIGS. 11-12), and the promotion effect is performed in the special mode at a different rate according to the effect mode of the predetermined effect. is executed (for example, refer to the decision example 87AK51 of the promotion effect corresponding to the cut-in effect in FIGS. 11 to 13), and is controlled to the advantageous state at different ratios according to the effect mode of the promotion effect (for example, FIG. 11- Determination example 87AK51 of the promotion effect according to the variable display result in 13) game machine is mentioned.

Such a configuration enables appropriate display control. Also, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As specific effects for displaying a moving image to which a character image is added, a promotion effect for promoting actions of the player, an action effect executed based on the detection result of the detection means capable of detecting the player's actions, , when displaying a moving image to which a character image is added in a predetermined effect executed during execution of the variable display, during the display period of the character image added to one moving image by the character image control means, the first You may make it change a component and a 2nd component. By doing so, the effect of the moving image to which the character image is added is executed by appropriate display control. The game interest can be further improved.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine capable of appropriately controlling the display and enhancing the player's interest in the game by appropriately enhancing the player's sense of anticipation through production, variable display is provided to the player. A gaming machine (eg, pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous advantageous state (eg, jackpot gaming state, etc.), and detecting means (eg, stick controller 31A, controller sensor unit 35A, etc.) capable of detecting player's actions. ), a specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display (for example, an active display area 87AKA1, a first reserved display area 87AKB1, a second reserved display area 87AKB2, etc.); (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing step 87AKS051 of variable display effect processing), and action effect execution means (for example, Effect control CPU 120 for executing step 87AKS053 of effect processing during variable display, etc.) and predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect during execution of variable display (for example, effect control for executing step 87AKS049 of effect processing during variable display) CPU 120 for use, etc.), and the specific display means includes a plurality of display modes (for example, display colors according to the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4) including a specific mode (for example, red display using the display image 87AKC4). The specific display can be displayed by any one of them, and the promotion effect execution means has a plurality of effect modes (for example, according to the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3) including a special mode (for example, a large V-con display using the display image 87AKF3) The promotion effect can be executed by any one of the above, and the predetermined effect execution means can execute a predetermined mode (for example, a message such as "Super heat !!" using the display image 87AKE3). (for example, a message corresponding to the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3), the predetermined effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes including the A predetermined effect is executed (see, for example, the cut-in effect determination example 87AK41 in FIGS. 11-12), and the promotion effect is executed by the special mode at a different rate according to the effect mode of the predetermined effect (for example, FIG. 11 -13 see the decision example 87AK51 of the promotion effect according to the cut-in effect), depending on the effect mode of the promotion effect, it is controlled to the advantageous state at a different rate (for example, the variable display result in FIGS. 11-13 Determination example 87AK51 of the corresponding promotion effect) gaming machine is exemplified. An example of the form of these gaming machines will be described below as another form.

(Description of Characteristic Portions 87AK to 89AK)
FIG. 11A shows a configuration example 87AKP0 of screen display on the image display device 5 regarding the characteristic portions 87AK to 89AK. In the configuration example 87AKP0, the screen of the image display device 5 is provided with an active display area 87AKA1, a first reserved display area 87AKB1, and a second reserved display area 87AKB2. In the active display area 87AKA1, active display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display being executed. In the first reserved display area 87AKB1, a reserved display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display whose execution is reserved according to the number of first reserved memories. In the second reserved display area 87AKB2, a reserved display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display whose execution is reserved according to the number of second reserved memories. Thus, in the active display area 87AKA1, the first reserved display area 87AKB1, and the second reserved display area 87AKB2, active display and reserved display, which are specific displays, can be performed based on the information regarding the variable display. The pending display in the first pending display area 87AKB1 is also called "first pending display", and the pending display in the second pending display area 87AKB2 is also called "second pending display".

The display area of the first pending display area 87AKB1 may be configured so that the first pending display is performed, for example, aligned to the right. The first reservation display area 87AKB1 is provided with four display parts corresponding to the upper limit of the first reservation storage number "4". , "4". Based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning hole, the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is increased. At this time, if there is no other first pending display in the first pending display area 87AKB1, at the right end display portion corresponding to the pending number "1" in the first pending display area 87AKB1, the first pending As a pending display corresponding to the number of memories, a display of an effect image showing a new first pending display is added. If there is another first reserved display in the first reserved display area 87AKB1, a non-displayed display located to the left of the display portion where the other first reserved display is being performed in the first reserved display area 87AKB1 At the site (the display site corresponding to any of the pending numbers "2" to "4"), as the pending display corresponding to the increased first pending memory number, the effect image showing the new first pending display Add display. When there are one or a plurality of first pending displays in the first pending display area 87AKB1, when a new first special game is started, the pending number corresponds to "1" in the first pending display area 87AKB1. At the display part on the right end, the first pending display is erased (digested). At this time, if there are first pending displays in the display parts corresponding to other pending numbers "2" to "4", those first pending displays are moved to the right in the direction of the erased display part ( shift). Thus, in the first pending display area 87AKB1, a first pending display corresponding to the first special figure game whose execution has been suspended without being started yet can be displayed according to the number of first pending memories. Further, in the first pending display area 87AKB1, by displaying the effect image that is the pending display image, the first pending display included in the pending display corresponding to the variable display that has not yet started is displayed as the corresponding display related to the variable display. It can be carried out.

The second pending display area 87AKB2 may be configured so that the second pending display is displayed left aligned, for example. The second reservation display area 87AKB2 is provided with four display parts corresponding to the upper limit of the second reservation storage number "4", and the reservation numbers "1", "2", and "3" are provided in order from the left end. , "4". The second reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is increased based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning hole. At this time, if there is no other second pending display in the second pending display area 87AKB2, at the display part at the left end corresponding to the pending number "1" in the second pending display area 87AKB2, the increased second pending As a pending display corresponding to the number of memories, a display of an effect image showing a new second pending display is added. If there is another second reserved display in the second reserved display area 87AKB2, a display that is in a non-display state on the right side of the display part where the other second reserved display is performed in the second reserved display area 87AKB2. At the part (the display part corresponding to any of the pending numbers "2" to "4"), as the pending display corresponding to the increased second pending memory number, the effect image showing the new second pending display Add display. When there are one or a plurality of second pending displays in the second pending display area 87AKB2, when a new second special game is started, the pending number corresponds to "1" in the second pending display area 87AKB2. At the display part on the left end, the second pending display is erased (digested). At this time, if there are second pending displays in the display parts corresponding to other pending numbers "2" to "4", those second pending displays are moved to the left in the direction of the erased display part ( shift). Thus, in the second pending display area 87AKB2, a second pending display corresponding to the second special figure game whose execution has been suspended without being started yet can be displayed according to the number of second pending memories. Further, in the second pending display area 87AKB2, by displaying the effect image that is the pending display image, the second pending display included in the pending display corresponding to the variable display that has not yet started is displayed as the corresponding display related to the variable display. It can be carried out.

In the active display area 87AKA1, in response to the start of the first special game, active display corresponding to the first reserved display erased (digested) in the first reserved display area 87AKB1 is started. Also, in the active display area 87AKA1, in response to the start of the second special game, active display corresponding to the second pending display erased (digested) in the second pending display area 87AKB2 is started. In the active display area 87AKA1, by displaying an effect image which is an active display image, active display corresponding to the variable display being executed can be performed as a corresponding display regarding the variable display. The first pending display, the second pending display, and the active display may have the same color and pattern. For example, the active display may be displayed larger than the first pending display and the second pending display. There may be. The display mode of the active display may change to a display mode different from that of the first reserved display and the second reserved display due to the execution of the active display change effect.

On the screen of the image display device 5 in the configuration example 87AKP0, an active display area 87AKA1 is arranged between the first reserved display area 87AKB1 and the second reserved display area 87AKB2. On the other hand, the active display area 87AKA1, the first reserved display area 87AKB1, and the second reserved display area 87AKB2 may be arranged at arbitrary positions on the screen of the image display device 5. FIG. For example, the first reserved display area 87AKB1 and the second reserved display area 87AKB2 may be replaced without changing the arrangement of the active display area 87AKA1.

In the characteristic portions 87AK to 89AK, as an example of the notice effect, the notice effect of "active display change" is executed. The notice effect of "active display change" changes the display mode of the active display in the active display area 87AKA1 in response to the variable display whose execution has started, and execution starts at a rate corresponding to the display mode after the change. The display result of the displayed variable display becomes "big win" and it is announced that the game state will be controlled to the big win game state. In the "active display change" notice effect, the display color of the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed is a specific color (e.g. blue, green, red, etc.) that differs from the predetermined color (e.g. white) normally used. ). It suffices if it is possible to suggest that the game will be controlled to the jackpot game state at a predetermined rate by a change in the display mode that can be recognized by the player, such as the display color of the active display. In the case of active display using effect images showing display patterns, messages, characters, etc., any display mode may be changeable to a display mode different from the normal display mode. The notice effect of "active display change" is also called change notice or change effect.

The suggestion effect is executed before the notice effect of "active display change" as the change effect is executed. The suggestive effect suggests that the display mode of the active display will change. After the suggestive effect is executed, the change effect may be executed, or the change effect may not be executed. Thus, after the suggestive effect is executed, there are cases where the display mode of the active display changes and cases where the display mode of the active display does not change. The suggestive production includes fake suggestive production. After execution of the false suggestion effect, the display mode of the active display does not change because the change effect is not executed. It is sufficient that the suggestive effect can be executed in a common effect mode regardless of whether the change effect is executed or the false suggestive effect is not executed. As a result, the player may be prevented from determining whether or not the display mode of the active display changes until the suggestive effect is finished. While the suggestive effect is executed before the change effect, there is a case where the change effect is not executed after the suggestive effect is executed. there is The suggestive effect may be executed in an effect mode that temporarily changes the display mode of the active display, such as displaying a character effect image in the active display area 87AKA1. However, the display mode of the active display changed by the suggestion effect is different from the display mode of the active display changed by the change effect, and the change in the display mode is undetermined. It is only necessary that it is impossible or difficult to determine, during execution of the suggestive effect, whether the change to the specific color display different from the white display is confirmed.

FIG. 11-2 shows a configuration example of variation patterns relating to characteristic portions 87AK to 89AK. These variation patterns may be prepared in advance so as to be usable in place of some or all of the variation patterns in the above embodiments, or together with some or all of the variation patterns in the above embodiments. A plurality of variation patterns differ in variable display mode of special figure variation time and decoration design. The special figure fluctuation time is the time required from the start of the variable display of the special figure to the stop display of the fixed special figure in the special figure games such as the first special figure game and the second special figure game. A plurality of variation patterns relating to the characteristic portions 87AK to 89AK include variation patterns corresponding to non-reach (losing), reach (losing), and big hits. Non-reach (losing) is a case where the fixed decorative symbols of the non-reach combination are displayed as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols is "non-reachable losing". A ready-to-win (lose) is a case in which fixed decorative patterns of a ready-to-win combination, which is not a big hit combination, are stopped and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is "ready-to-lose". A big hit is a case in which the fixed decorative symbols of the big winning combination are displayed in a stationary manner as the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is "big hit". A variation pattern corresponding to non-reach (loss) is a non-reach variation pattern, a variation pattern corresponding to reach (loss) is a reach variation pattern, and a variation pattern corresponding to a big win is a big win variation pattern. The non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are also collectively referred to as a loss fluctuation pattern. In the reach fluctuation pattern and the jackpot fluctuation pattern, after executing the reach production that becomes normal reach, the display result of the variable display is stopped and displayed "Normal" fluctuation pattern, and after executing the reach production that becomes normal reach, it becomes super reach It includes a "super" variation pattern in which the display result of the variable display is stopped after the ready-to-win effect that develops into the ready-to-win effect and the super-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-reach performances that become super ready-to-win include super-A and super-B ready-to-reach performances having different performance modes.

FIG. 11-3 shows an example of determining the variation pattern. Variation pattern determination example, big hit variation pattern determination example 87AK01 shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), loss variation pattern determination example (normal time) 87AK02 shown in FIG. B2) includes a loss variation pattern determination example (during time saving) 87AK03. The big hit variation pattern determination example 87AK01 corresponds to the case where the display result of the variable display is "big hit". Loss variation pattern determination example (normal time) 87AK02 corresponds to the case where the display result of the variable display is "loss" in the normal state where the time saving control is not performed. Loss variation pattern determination example (during time saving) 87AK03 corresponds to the case where the display result of the variable display is "loss" in the time saving state in which time saving control is performed. In the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process, if the display result of the variable display becomes a "jackpot", or if the normal time when the time saving control is not performed becomes "losing", the time saving control is performed. The variation pattern at the time of big hit or at the time of loss is determined using the selected variation pattern determination table according to the case of "losing" during the time saving. When determining the variation pattern, the numerical data representing the random number value for determining the variation pattern is read from the variation random number buffer. The variable random number buffer can store the random number extracted when the start prize determination process is executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process. The effect control CPU 120 compares the random number value for determining the variation pattern read from the random number buffer for variation with the determination value set in advance in the selected variation pattern determination table. Then, a variation pattern to be used is determined according to the determination result as to which range of the range of determination values assigned to each variation pattern contains the random number value for determining the variation pattern. In addition, it may be determined whether or not the ready-to-win state is set when the game is “lost” by a process separate from the determination of the variation pattern.

In the big hit variation pattern determination example 87AK01, the number of determination values assigned to the variation pattern of "super" such as variation patterns PA3-2 and PA3-3 is the variation pattern PA3-1, such as "normal" variation pattern Each variation pattern is assigned a decision value such that it is greater than the number of decision values assigned to . On the other hand, in the loss variation pattern determination example (normal time) 87AK02 and the loss variation pattern determination example (time saving) 87AK03, such as variation pattern PA2-1, the number of determination values assigned to the "normal" variation pattern is assigned a determined value to each variation pattern such that the number of determined values is greater than the number of determined values assigned to the "super" variation patterns such as the variation patterns PA2-2 and PA2-3. As a result, when the display result of the variable display is stopped and displayed after the ready-to-reach effect that becomes super reach is executed, the ready-to-reach effect that becomes super ready-to-win is not executed even if the ready-to-reach effect that becomes normal reach is executed, and the variable display is displayed. The degree of expectation of big win (reliability of big win) becomes higher than when the display result is stopped and displayed.

Loss variation pattern determination example (normal time) In 87AK02, the number of assigned determination values varies depending on which value the number of first reserved storage is 0, 1, or 2 or more. may be set to include According to such a setting, according to the number of 1st reservation storage, the average variable display time (special figure fluctuation time) of a special design or a decoration design should just be made different. Each It suffices if a determined value is assigned to the variation pattern. Loss variation pattern determination example (during time saving) 87AK03, the number of assigned determination values depending on which value the second reservation number is 0, 1, or 2 or more Variation patterns with different numbers may be set to include According to such a setting, according to the number of 2nd reservation storage, the average variable display time (special figure fluctuation time) of a special design and a decoration design should just be made different. Each It suffices if a determined value is assigned to the variation pattern. Loss variation pattern decision example (time saving) 87AK03, compared to loss variation pattern decision example (normal time) 87AK02, decision assigned to a variation pattern with a shorter special figure variation time than a variation pattern with a longer special figure variation time A decision value may be assigned to each variation pattern so that the number of values increases. As a result, when the time saving control is performed, the average variable display time of the special pattern and the decoration pattern can be shortened more than the normal time when the time saving control is not performed.

In the normal time when the time saving control is not performed, it is difficult for the game ball to pass (enter) the second start winning opening, and the frequency of executing the special figure game using the second special figure is low. Therefore, when the execution of the special game using the second special figure is started normally and the display result of the variable display is "loss", regardless of the second reserved memory number, the first reserved memory number is The variation pattern may be determined by referring to the same table data as in the case of the predetermined value (for example, "0"). Alternatively, when execution of the special game using the second special figure is started at normal times and the display result of the variable display is "lost", the special figure game is started regardless of the number of second reserved memories. The variation pattern may be determined by referring to table data corresponding to the first reserved storage number at the point in time. Alternatively, in response to the fact that the special game using the second special figure is preferentially executed over the special game using the first special figure, an example of determining a losing variation pattern regardless of the number of second reserved memories (Normal time) The variation pattern may be determined by referring to table data in which the allocation of determination values is different from that of 87AK02. Alternatively, when the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started at normal time and the display result of the variable display is "losing", the "first reservation A change pattern may be determined by reading table data corresponding to the second reserved storage number by replacing "the number of stored" with "second reserved storage number".

During the time saving control when the time saving control is performed, the game ball is likely to pass (enter) the second start winning opening, and the frequency of executing the special figure game using the second special figure is high. When the special game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure, the special game using the second special figure is repeated during the time saving. There is a high possibility that it will be executed, and the frequency of executing the special figure game using the first special figure is low. And, when starting the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure during time saving, the number of second reserved memories is 0. Therefore, when the execution of the special game using the first special figure is started during the time saving and the display result of the variable display becomes "losing", regardless of the number of first reserved memories, the number of second reserved memories is a predetermined value (for example, "0"), the variation pattern may be determined by referring to the same table data. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined by referring to table data in which the allocation of the determination value is different from that of the example of losing variation pattern determination (during time saving) 87AK03 regardless of the number of first reserved memories. Alternatively, if the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started during the time saving and the display result of the variable display is "loss", the "second A change pattern may be determined by reading table data corresponding to the first reserved storage number by replacing "number of reserved storage" with "first reserved storage number".

FIGS. 11-4 (A1) to (A4) show active display examples for characteristic portions 87AK to 89AK. The active display can be displayed in a different display mode such as display color. In this active display example, four display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect images that can be used for active display. The number of display images that can be used for active display is not limited to four, and may be any number of images based on any design. The display image 87AKC1 is an effect image when displaying a character representing a coin in white. The display image 87AKC2 is an effect image when a character representing coins is displayed in blue. The display image 87AKC3 is an effect image when a character representing coins is displayed in green. The display image 87AKC4 is an effect image when a character representing coins is displayed in red. In the active display, the display image 87AKC1 is displayed in white with a character representing a coin as a normal display mode. The change rendering includes the case where the display color of the active display is any one of blue, green, and red. Of these, when the display color is red, the expectation of a big win is higher than when the display color is blue or green. When the display color is green, the expectation of a big win is higher than when the display color is blue. Thus, the active display can be displayed in one of a plurality of display modes such as white display, blue display, green display, and red display. Also, the active display can be displayed in a specific mode such as red display using the display image 87AKC4. The active display may be displayed in different display modes depending on the type, size, shape, and pattern of the character, and any display mode of the effect image, together with the display color or instead of the display color.

FIGS. 11-4 (B1) to (B3) show examples of suggestive effects relating to characteristic portions 87AK to 89AK. The suggestive effect can be executed by changing the effect mode including the display mode, such as a character. In this suggestive effect example, three display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect images that can be used for the suggestive effect. The number of display images that can be used for suggestive rendering is not limited to three, and may be a plurality of images based on any design. The display image 87AKD1 is an effect image when the character representing the coin explodes in the active display. The display image 87AKD2 is an effect image in the case where the character indicating the coin is illuminated in the active display. The display image 87AKD3 is an effect image when the character representing the coin rotates in the active display. In the suggestive effect, the ratio of whether or not the display mode of the active display is changed by the execution of the change effect differs depending on the execution timing and the effect mode. In addition, the ratio of which of the plurality of display modes the display mode of the active display changes after execution of the change effect differs according to the effect mode of the suggestive effect. In this way, the suggestive effect can be executed in one of a plurality of effect modes such as the effect mode of displaying any one of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3.

FIGS. 11-5 (A1) to (A3) show examples of cut-in effects relating to characteristic portions 87AK to 89AK. The cut-in effect can be executed at a predetermined timing during execution of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win after establishment of the ready-to-win effect in which the variable display of the decoration pattern is in the ready-to-win mode. In the cut-in effect, for example, an effect image of a character reporting a message is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. FIG. The cut-in effect is a ratio corresponding to whether or not it is executed with the ready-to-win effect that becomes super reach, or a ratio according to the effect mode when it is executed, and the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit" and the big win game state. forewarning that it will be controlled by The cut-in production is the content of the message by the character, the type of character, size, shape, pattern, color, the type of frame that will be the outer frame, size, shape, pattern, color, the type of effect display, size, shape, pattern, It is sufficient if it can be executed in different rendering modes depending on the display mode of arbitrary rendering images such as colors.

In the cut-in effect examples of FIGS. 11-5 (A1) to (A3), three display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect images that can be used for the cut-in effect. The number of prepared display images that can be used for the cut-in effect is not limited to three, and may be a plurality of images based on an arbitrary design. The display image 87AKE1 is an effect image in the case of displaying a character reporting the message "???". The display image 87AKE2 is an effect image in the case of displaying a character that announces the message "chance!!". The display image 87AKE3 is an effect image in the case of displaying a character that reports the message "Super heat!!". In the cut-in effect, the ratio of whether or not it is executed and the ratio of notifying the message "Extreme heat!!" differ according to the display mode of the active display. In this way, the cut-in effect can be executed in one of a plurality of effect modes, such as the effect mode of a message notified by displaying any one of the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3. Also, the cut-in effect can be executed in a predetermined mode, such as a mode of notifying the message "Super heat!!" using the display image 87AKE3.

FIGS. 11-5 (B1) to (B3) show examples of promotional effects relating to characteristic portions 87AK to 89AK. The promotion effect can be executed at the final stage of the ready-to-win effect that becomes super reach. By executing the promotion effect, the action of the player, such as the action of tilting the operating rod of the stick controller 31A serving as the V-controller, is promoted. The tilting operation for tilting the operating rod of the stick controller 31A may include a pulling operation for tilting the operating rod forward. In the promotion effect, a effect image, which is a V-con image imitating the stick controller 31A, is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. Along with the V-con image, a meter image may be displayed to inform of the remaining period for effectively detecting the player's motion. Along with the V-con image, a character image that notifies the message “Close!!” may be displayed. By displaying such a V-con image, a meter image, a character image, or an effect image including a combination of some or all of them, it is possible to promote the player's action of pulling the V-controller. In the promotion effect, the ratio of which effect mode among the plurality of effect modes is selected depends on whether or not the display result of the variable display is "big win" and the game state is controlled to the big win game state. The promotion effect may be executed in different effect modes depending on the size, shape, pattern, color, and other display modes of arbitrary effect images for V-con images, meter images, and character images.

In the example of the promotion effect shown in FIGS. 11-5 (B1) to (B3), three display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect images that can be used for the promotion effect. The number of prepared effect images that can be used for the promotion effect is not limited to three, and may be a plurality of images based on an arbitrary design. A display image 87AKF1 is an effect image in the case of a small V-con display in which a small-sized V-con image is displayed together with a meter image and a character image. The display image 87AKF2 is an effect image in the case of a middle V-con display in which a medium-sized V-con image is displayed together with a meter image and a character image. A display image 87AKF3 is an effect image in the case of a large V-con display in which a large-sized V-con image is displayed together with a meter image and a character image. In the promotion effect, the ratio of the large V-con display may be changed according to the presence or absence of the cut-in effect and the effect mode, or the ratio of the large V-con display may be changed according to the presence or absence of the change effect and the execution timing. Alternatively, the ratio of the large V-con display may be varied according to the presence or absence of the suggestive effect and the mode of effect. In the ready-to-win effect that is super ready-to-win, when the player's action of pulling the V controller is detected in response to the promotion effect, the final notification effect that is an action effect is executed. In this way, the promotion effect can be executed in one of a plurality of effect modes, such as the effect mode corresponding to the size of the V-con display displaying any one of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3. Further, the promotion effect can be executed by a special mode such as a mode of effect of large V-con display using the display image 87AKF3.

FIG. 11-6 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S171 of the effect control process processing as the variable display start setting processing. In the variable display start setting process, the final stop pattern etc. are determined (step 87AKS021). The effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop pattern based on the variable display contents such as the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command and the variable pattern indicated by the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11. You just have to decide. When the variation pattern setting process is executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process, the variation pattern designation command and the display result notification command are set to send the command at the start of the variation of the special symbol. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the performance control board 12 . The variation pattern specification command is an effect control command that specifies the variation pattern determined as the usage pattern. The variable display result notification command is an effect control command that specifies the variable display result determined using the random number value for special figure display result determination. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the variation pattern and the variable display result include "non-reach (losing)", "reach (losing)", "non-probability (big hit)", and "probability (big hit)". I wish I had.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (losing)", the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is " Lost.” When the variable display content is "ready (losing)", after the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the determined decorative pattern of the ready-to-lose combination is displayed in a stopped state, and the display result of the variable display is "losing". Become. When the variable display content is "unprobability variable (big win)", the display result of the variable display becomes "big win", and the game state after the big win game state is a time saving state. When the variable display content is "variable probability (big win)", the display result of the variable display becomes "big win", and the game state after the end of the big win game state becomes the variable probability state.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (losing)", the effect control CPU 120 displays different (mismatched) decorative designs in the "left" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L and 5R as the final stop design. to decide. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left finalized symbol that is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect, and uses the determined left symbol determination table that is stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared. By referring to it, the left finalized decorative design to be stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined among the finalized decorative designs. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the right finalized symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for performance is extracted, and the right finalized symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared is referred to. In this manner, the right confirmed decorative design to be stopped and displayed in the "right" decorative design display area 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined among the confirmed decorative designs. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol is determined to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined decorative symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, the numerical data representing the random number value for medium-definite pattern determination updated by the random number circuit 124 or the performance random counter is extracted, and the medium-definite pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared is referred to. In this manner, among the confirmed decorative symbols, the middle confirmed decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 are determined.

When the variable display content is "ready (losing)", the effect control CPU 120 displays the same (matching) decorative design as the final stop design in the "left" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L and 5R. to decide. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data representing random number values for determining left and right determined symbols updated by a random number circuit 124 or a random counter for effect, and uses a determined left and right symbol determination table which is stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared. By referring to the fixed decorative patterns, the decorative patterns having the same pattern number, which are stop-displayed together in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5, are displayed. decide. Further, numerical data indicating a random number value for medium-definite pattern determination updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter is extracted, and a medium-definite pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 is referred to. Thus, among the confirmed decoration symbols, the middle confirmed decoration symbols to be stopped and displayed in the "middle" decoration symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 are determined. Here, for example, when the pattern number of the middle fixed decorative pattern is the same as the pattern number of the left fixed decorative pattern and the right fixed decorative pattern, when the fixed decorative patterns become a big hit combination, an arbitrary value By adding or subtracting (for example, "1") to or from the symbol number of the middle determined decorative symbol, the determined decorative symbol may not be a jackpot combination but be a ready-to-win combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium fixed decorative pattern, the difference (design difference) between the pattern numbers of the left fixed decorative pattern and the right fixed decorative pattern may be determined, and the medium fixed decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern difference may be set. .

When the variable display content is "non-probability variation (big hit)" or "probability variation (big hit)", the effect control CPU 120 displays the "left", "middle", and "right" decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. , the same (matching) decorative design is determined as the final stop design. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a big hit determined symbol that is updated by a random number circuit 124 or a random counter for effect. Subsequently, by referring to the jackpot fixed symbol determination table prepared in advance in the ROM 121, the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5L, and 5L on the screen of the image display device 5, The decorative symbols having the same symbol number, which are stop-displayed together in 5C and 5R, are determined. At this time, the normal pattern (for example, even It suffices if it is determined which of the decorative symbols showing odd numbers) and the probability variable patterns (for example, the decorative symbols indicating odd numbers) should be determined as the fixed decorative symbols. In the promotion performance during the big win, after a combination of decorative symbols (non-variable big win combination) that reminds the player of the big win but not the variable probability state is once stopped and displayed on the image display device 5, it is displayed during the big win game state or in the big win game state.例文帳に追加It is an effect that informs whether or not it will be in a probability changing state at the end of.

As a specific example, when the variable display content is "non-probability variable (big hit)", a fixed decoration pattern is determined from among a plurality of types of normal symbols. Further, when it is determined that the variable display content is ``probability variation (big hit)'' and promotion performance during the big win is not executed, the fixed decoration pattern is determined from a plurality of types of probability variation patterns. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the promotion performance during the big win even if the variable display content is ``probability variable (big win)'', the fixed decoration pattern is decided from among a plurality of kinds of normal patterns. As a result, it is possible to prevent the promotion performance during the big win from being executed in spite of the derivation display of all the probability variable symbols as the fixed decoration symbols, so as not to give the player a sense of distrust.

When the variable display content is "non-probability variation (big hit)" or "probability variation (big hit)", in step 126 AKS011, it is determined whether or not to execute a probability variation promotion effect such as a re-lottery effect or a promotion effect during a big hit. may be broken. In the re-lottery performance, it is once difficult or impossible to recognize that the decorative patterns of the non-probable variable jackpot combination consisting of the same normal patterns are once displayed during the variable display of the decorative patterns, so that the control to the variable probability state is made difficult, By variably displaying (re-varying) the decoration patterns again and stop-displaying the decoration patterns of the probability variable jackpot combination consisting of the same probability variation patterns, the player can be notified in a recognizable manner that the probability variation state is controlled. In some cases, the decoration symbols of the non-probability variation big hit combination are stopped and displayed after the decoration symbols are varied again in the re-lottery production, so that the control to the probability variation state may not be notified. When it is determined in step 126AKS011 that the re-lottery effect is to be executed, the combination of decoration symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed may be determined before the execution of the re-lottery effect.

After determining the final stop symbol and the like in step 87AKS021, effect determination processing is executed (step 87AKS022). In the effect determination process, the final display image that is the final display mode of the active display, the change pattern used for the change effect, the suggestion effect, the cut-in effect, the promotion effect, and the like may be determined. Subsequently, one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance is determined as the effect control pattern (step 87AKS023). For example, the production control CPU120 selects one of the prepared production control patterns (special figure fluctuation production control pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern specification command, and uses it as a pattern. set. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 may select one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns and set it as a use pattern in response to the execution setting of various effects by the effect determination process of step 87AKS022. The plurality of production control patterns include a changing production control pattern for executing a changing production, a suggestive production control pattern for executing a suggestive production, a cut-in production control pattern for executing a cut-in production, and a promotion production. Promotion effect control pattern for doing may be included. A plurality of production control patterns corresponding to variable display of decorative patterns and various productions may be individually determined, or a single production control pattern corresponding to a combination of variable display of decorative patterns and execution settings of various productions may be determined. A production control pattern may be determined collectively.

When the production control pattern is determined by step 87AKS023, for example, corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, the initialization of the production control process timer provided in a predetermined area (production control timer setting unit etc.) of RAM122 A value is set (step 87AKS024). Then, the setting for starting the variation of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 is performed (step 87AKS025). At this time, for example, by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the production control pattern (special figure fluctuation time production control pattern) determined by step 87AKS023 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, etc. The variation of the decorative design may be started in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

After setting the start of fluctuation in step 87AKS025, in response to the start of the variable display, such as the first pending display in the first pending display area 87AKB1 and the second pending display in the second pending display area 87AKB2. etc. are set (step 87AKS026). For example, when the first special game is executed (started), in the first reservation display area 87AKB1, the display part (rightmost display part) corresponding to the reservation number "1" is erased (digested). , moves (shifts) the first pending displays in the display portions corresponding to the other pending numbers "2" to "4" one by one in the right direction. On the other hand, when the second special game is executed (started), in the second reservation display area 87AKB2, the display part (leftmost display part) corresponding to the reservation number "1" is erased (digested). , moves (shifts) the second pending displays in the display portions corresponding to the other pending numbers "2" to "4" one by one in the left direction. As a result, the pending display is shifted. In accordance with the shifting of the pending display, the storage contents of the pending display data storage unit may also be shifted. In addition, settings are made for updating the active display in the active display area 87AKA1 corresponding to the erased pending display. As a result, with the start of the variable display, it is possible to start the display of the effect image that becomes the active display in the active display area 87AKA1.

It should be noted that when the number of first reserved memory and the number of second reserved memory are both "0", if the variable display is started immediately based on the occurrence of the first start winning prize or the second start winning prize, the second A setting may be made to update the active display in the active display area 87AKA1 without updating the 1 pending display or the 2nd pending display. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 may start the active display in the active display area 87AKA1 as a normal display mode in the active display, in which the active display is a white display in a solid round shape. After updating the pending display or the like in step 87AKS026, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step 87AKS027), and then the variable display start setting process is terminated. .

FIG. 11-7 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 87AKS022 of the variable display start setting process as the effect determination process. In the effect determination process, the final display image for active display is determined (step 87AKS101). The final display image of the active display is the effect image that is finally displayed as the active display. At step 87AKS101, one of display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4 can be determined depending on whether the display mode of the active display is not changed or is changed. After that, the change pattern of the active display is determined (step 87AKS102). The change pattern of the active display is used for a change effect that changes the display mode of the active display. The change pattern of the active display is an effect pattern that can specify the effect mode of the change effect, and it is sufficient that a plurality of patterns are stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 121 or the like. At step 87 AKS102, it is determined whether or not there is a change effect in order to determine the change pattern of the active display. Whether or not there is a change effect is either "changed" or "no change", depending on the result of comparison between the image before change, which is the display mode when active display is started, and the final display image. is determined by For example, the pre-change image and the final display image are compared, and if the two are different display images, it is determined that the change effect is to be executed. When the variable display is started while the pre-change image and the final display image do not match, the display of the effect image to be the active display is changed directly or step by step to the final display image by executing the change effect. All you have to do is If the pre-change image and the final display image are the same display image, it is sufficient to determine "no change" that does not execute the change effect. If it is determined to be "no change" that does not execute the change effect, it is sufficient to determine no change pattern of the active display. When it is determined to "with change" to execute the change performance, it is possible to determine a single or a plurality of change patterns corresponding to a plurality of timings at which the change performance can be executed.

Following step 87AKS102, a suggested effect is determined (step 87AKS103). At step 87AKS103, it is possible to determine one of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 corresponding to the timing at which the change effect is executed. Also, even at the timing when the change effect is not executed, any of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 can be determined if the guess suggestive effect is to be executed. Next, as the ready-to-win effect corresponding to the variation pattern, it is determined whether or not there is a super ready-to-win effect for executing the ready-to-win effect (step 87AKS104). At this time, if it is determined that the ready-to-win effect in the super-ready-to-win is not executed and that there is no super (step 87AKS104; No), the effect determination processing is terminated. When it is determined that there is a super game (step 87AKS104; Yes), the cut-in effect is determined (step 87AKS105), the promotion effect is determined (step 87AKS106), and then the effect determination process is terminated.

FIG. 11-8 shows an example of determining the final display image. In step 87AKS101 of the effect determination process, a random number value for determining the final display image is extracted, and the final display image is determined by referring to the final display image determination table according to the variable display content based on the random value. Just do it. As an example of determination of the final display image, it is sufficient if there is a determination example 87AK11 based on the determination ratio according to the variable display contents as shown in FIG. 11-8. Determination example 87AK11 includes cases of "non-reach (losing)", "normal (losing)", "super (losing)", and "big hit" as variable display contents for determining the final display image. When the variable display content is "no reach (loss)", it corresponds to the case where the display result of the variable display is "loss" and the ready-reach effect is not executed due to the non-reach variation pattern. If the variable display content is "normal (losing)", it corresponds to the case where the display result of the variable display is "losing", and the reach effect that becomes normal reach is executed due to the "normal" fluctuation pattern. there is If the variable display content is "Super (Loss)", it corresponds to the case where the display result of the variable display is "Loss", and the reach effect that becomes super reach is executed due to the fluctuation pattern of "Super". ing. When the variable display content is "big win", it corresponds to the case where the display result of the variable display is "big win".

In the determination example 87AK11 shown in FIG. 11-8, the determination ratio of the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4 to be the final display images differs depending on whether or not the variable display content is "big win" and the game state is controlled to the big win game state. For example, the display image 87AKC1 is determined at the highest rate when the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)" or "normal (loss)", and the variable display content is "super (loss)" or "big hit". , the decision rate is low. On the other hand, the display image 87AKC4 has a determination ratio of 0/100 (=0%) and cannot be determined when the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)" or "normal (loss)". Among cases where the content is a "jackpot", the decision ratio is the highest. Due to the difference in the determination ratio according to such variable display contents, when the final display image is the display image 87AKC4, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big win game state is the highest. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC3, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big win game state is lower than the display image 87AKC4, but higher than the display images 87AKC2 and 87AKC1. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC2, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big win game state is lower than the display images 87AKC4 and 87AKC3, but higher than the display image 87AKC1. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC1, the expectation of being controlled to the big win game state is the lowest. In this way, the active display may suggest that the game is controlled to the big win game state at different ratios according to the display mode such as the display color.

FIG. 11-9 shows a configuration example of a change pattern used for a change effect and timings when the change effect can be executed. In the change pattern configuration example shown in FIG. 11-9(A), change patterns 87AKP1-1 to 87AKP1-6 are prepared in advance as a plurality of change patterns that can be used for change effects. The plurality of change patterns correspond to a combination of a display image of active display (pre-change image) before execution of the change effect and a display image of active display (post-change image) after execution of the change effect. For example, the change pattern 87AKP1-1 is used when the image before change is the display image 87AKC1 and the image after change is the display image 87AKC2 due to the change effect. The change pattern 87AKP1-2 is used when the image before change is the display image 87AKC1 and the image after change is the display image 87AKC3 due to the change effect. The change patterns 87AKP1-3 are used when the display image 87AKC1 is the pre-change image and the display image 87AKC4 is the post-change image due to the change effect. The change patterns 87AKP1-4 are used when the image before change is the display image 87AKC2 and the image after change is the display image 87AKC3 by the change effect. The change patterns 87AKP1-5 are used when the image before change is the display image 87AKC2 and the image after change is the display image 87AKC4 due to the change effect. The change patterns 87AKP1-6 are used when the pre-change image is the display image 87AKC3 and the post-change image is the display image 87AKC4 by the change effect. The change performance can be executed at a single or a plurality of timings during the execution of the variable display of the decoration pattern according to the variation pattern.

FIG. 11-9 (B1) shows the timing at which the change effect can be executed in the case of non-reach (losing) corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern. In the case of non-reach (losing), it is possible to execute the change effect at the timing before the establishment of reach, which is the first timing. In this way, when the variable display of the decorative design does not become the ready-to-win mode, it is possible to execute the change effect at a single timing during the execution of the variable display of the decorative design.

FIG. 11-9 (B2) shows the timing at which the variation effect can be executed when the ready-to-reach effect of normal reach is executed in correspondence with the "normal" variation pattern. When the ready-to-win effect of normal ready-to-win is executed, the change effect can be executed at the first timing before the ready-to-win is established or after the ready-to-win is established. In this way, when the variable display of decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win state and the ready-to-win performance of normal ready-to-win is executed, the change performance can be executed at two timings during the execution of the variable display of the decorative patterns.

FIG. 11-9 (B3) shows the timing at which the change effect can be executed when the ready-to-reach effect of super-reach is executed corresponding to the variation pattern of "super". When the ready-to-reach effect that becomes super reach is executed, the change effect can be executed at the timing of the first timing, before the reach is established, after the reach is established, at the time of super development, and at the timing of the cut-in effect, which is the second timing. is. In this way, when the variable display of decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode and the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win is executed, the changing performance can be executed at four timings during the execution of the variable display of the decorative patterns. The first timing and the second timing may be any timing as long as the relationship that the second timing is later than the first timing is maintained. In addition, it is not limited to these timings, as long as it is possible to execute the change effect at a single or a plurality of timings while executing the variable display of the decoration pattern. In the active display area 87AKA1, in response to the start of the variable display of the decoration pattern, the display of the effect image to be the active display is started. After the active display is started in this manner, the cut-in effect can be executed before the action effect is executed in the ready-to-win effect that becomes super reach.

FIGS. 11-10 show examples of determination of change patterns. In step 87AKS102 of the effect determination process, a random value for determining a change pattern is extracted, and based on the random value, a change pattern determination table is referred to according to the final display image in the active display. A change pattern corresponding to the timing may be determined. Examples of determining the change pattern include an example of determining "without super" corresponding to a variation pattern other than the "super" variation pattern, and a determination example of "with super" corresponding to the variation pattern of "super" It is sufficient if the decision example is included.

FIG. 11-10(A) shows a determination example 87AK21 of a change pattern corresponding to before establishment of reach, which is the first timing, as a determination example of "no super". In determination example 87AK21, presence or absence and type of change pattern corresponding to the first timing are determined according to the final display image in the active display. When it is determined that there is no change pattern, the change performance is not executed. For example, when the final display image is the display image 87AKC1, since the display mode of the active display does not change from the normal white display mode, 100/100 (=100%) corresponds to not executing the change effect. Determine without change pattern in the proportion of . When the final display image is the display image 87AKC2, the change pattern at a ratio of 100/100 (=100%) corresponds to changing the white display, which is the normal mode, to the blue display as the display mode of the active display. 87AKP1-1 is determined. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC3, the change pattern at a ratio of 100/100 (=100%) corresponds to changing the white display, which is the normal mode, to the green display as the display mode of the active display. We decide on 87AKP1-2. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC4, the change pattern at a ratio of 100/100 (=100%) corresponds to changing the white display, which is the normal mode, to the red display as the display mode of the active display. We decide on 87AKP1-3.

FIG. 11-10(B) shows a determination example 87AK22 of a variation pattern corresponding to the first timing before establishment of reach and the second timing during the cut-in effect, as an example of determination of "with super". there is In decision example 87AK22, presence or absence and type of change patterns corresponding to the first timing and the second timing are decided according to the final display image in the active display. For example, when the final display image is the display image 87AKC1, since the display mode of the active display does not change from the normal white display mode, 100/100 (=100%) corresponds to not executing the change effect. is determined without changing patterns of the first timing and the second timing. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC4, the display mode of the active display is changed from white display, which is the normal mode, to red display. In this case, the combination of the first timing change pattern 87AKP1-1 and the second timing change pattern 87AKP1-5 is determined at a rate of 30/100 (=30%), and 30/100 (=30%). The combination of the first timing change pattern 87AKP1-2 and the second timing change pattern 87AKP1-6 is determined at a ratio of 30/100 (=30%) without the first timing change pattern and the second timing change pattern A combination with the timing change pattern 87AKP1-3 is determined, and a combination of the first timing change pattern 87AKP1-3 and no second timing change pattern is determined at a ratio of 10/100 (=10%). In this manner, the presence or absence of the change effect and the change pattern corresponding to the timing are determined at different ratios according to the display mode of the active display. Also, it is sufficient that the final display mode of the active display can be suggested at different ratios according to the presence or absence of the change effect and the change pattern corresponding to single or multiple timings during execution of the variable display.

In the determination example 87AK21, the second timing change pattern 87AKP1-1 has a determination ratio of 0/100 (=0%). Accordingly, at the second timing, the active display does not change from the normal white display to the blue display. Since the second timing is the cut-in performance during execution of the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win, the expectation of being controlled to the big hit game state is increasing. At such timing, if the display changes to a blue display with a low degree of expectation, it suggests that the possibility of being controlled to a jackpot game state is low, and there is a risk that the player will feel uncomfortable and lose interest. There is Therefore, at the second timing, it is set so as not to execute a change effect in which the active display changes from white display to blue display. As a result, at the timing when the expectation for the big win game state is heightened, it is possible to prevent the decrease in the interest in the game due to the discomfort of the change performance suggesting that the expectation is low.

In the determination ratio of determination example 87AK21, when the first timing is determined to be the variation pattern PA1-3, the second timing is determined without the variation pattern, so the variation effect is not executed at the second timing. Since the change pattern PA1-3 changes the active display from the white display of the display image 87AKC1 to the red display of the display image 87AKC4, the display mode of the active display cannot be changed further. In this way, before the cut-in effect that is the second timing, in response to the case where the display mode of the active display is the red display that is the specific mode, the change effect is not executed at the second timing. Do not change the display mode of the display. Further, when the change effect is executed at the first timing before the second timing, the display mode of the active display can be changed to red display, so the degree of freedom of the change pattern in the change effect increases. , various productions can be performed. Even if the display mode of the active display changes to a specific mode such as red display at the first timing, for example, if a special effect such as promotion effect is performed as a cut-in effect, active display will be performed at the second timing. The display mode of the active display may be further changed at the second timing, such as changing the display mode of to gold display.

FIG. 11-11 shows an example of determination of suggestive effects including a false suggestive effect. At step 87AKS103 of the effect determination process, it is decided whether or not to execute the cheat suggestive effect, that is, whether or not to execute the cheat suggestive effect, corresponding to the timing at which the change effect is not executed, out of the first timing and the second timing. good. At this time, for example, a random value for determining the execution of the cheat suggestion effect is extracted, and based on the random value, the cheat suggestion effect execution determination table is referred to according to the timing at which the change effect is not executed, thereby executing the cheat suggestion effect. It is necessary to decide whether or not As an example of determining the execution of the guess effect, there may be a determination example 87AK31 based on the determination ratio according to the first timing and the second timing as shown in FIG. 11-11(A). In addition, in step 87AKS103 of the effect determination process, a random number value for determining a suggestive effect is extracted, and based on the random value, according to the change pattern used in the change effect, a single Alternatively, an effect image to be used for suggestive effects corresponding to a plurality of timings may be determined. As an example of determination of the suggestive effect, a determination example 87AK32 based on the determination ratio according to the change pattern as shown in FIG. 11-11(B) may be used.

In the determination example 87AK31 shown in FIG. 11-11(A), it is determined to either "executed" to execute the trick suggestion effect or "no execution" not to execute, corresponding to the first timing and the second timing. . However, in the case of "no super", since the variable display ends before the cut-in effect of the second timing is reached, it is sufficient to decide whether or not to execute the false suggestive effect corresponding to the first timing. In decision example 87AK31, the decision ratio of whether or not to execute the guess-suggestion effect differs depending on whether it is the first timing or the second timing. For example, at the first timing, a 10/100 (=10%) ratio is determined to be “executed”, and a 90/100 (=90%) ratio is determined to be “not executed”. At the second timing, "executed" is determined at a rate of 0/100 (=0%), and "not executed" is determined at a rate of 100/100 (=100%). As a result, a limit is set such that the trick suggesting performance is executed at a predetermined rate in the range of the first timing, while the trick suggesting performance is not executed in the range of the second timing after the first timing. It should be noted that the restriction is not limited to the fact that the guess suggestion performance is not executed at the second timing, and a restriction may be set as a limit such that the execution rate of the guess suggestion performance is lower at the second timing than at the first timing. By setting these restrictions, at the second timing when the expectation to be controlled to the big winning game state is heightened, the event that the change performance is not executed even if the suggestive performance is executed is stopped or reduced. As a result, at the timing when the expectation for the big win game state is heightened, it is possible to prevent the decrease in the interest in the game due to the discomfort caused by the false suggestion performance.

A determination example 87AK32 shown in FIG. 11-11(B) includes a case where the determination ratio of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 used for the suggestive effect differs according to the change pattern used for the change effect. For example, when there is no change pattern corresponding to the false suggestion effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKD1 is 80/100 (=80%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKD2 is 20/100 (=20%). Yes, and the determined ratio of the display image 87AKD3 is 0/100 (=0%). In this case, the display image 87AKD3 is not determined. Therefore, when the suggestive effect using the display image 87AKD3 is executed, the change effect is always executed without executing the false suggestive effect, so that the display mode of the active display can be changed. In the case of any one of the change patterns 87AKP1-3, 87AKP1-5, and 87AKP1-6, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKD1 is 10/100 (=10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKD2 is 30/100. (=30%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKD3 is 60/100 (=60%). In the change patterns 87AKP1-3, 87AKP1-5, and 87AKP1-6, the post-change image is the display image 87AKC4, and the display mode of active display is changed to red display. Due to the difference in the determination ratio according to the change pattern, when the suggestive effect using the display image 87AKD3 is executed, the degree of expectation that the display mode of the active display changes to red display due to the change effect is the highest. When the suggestive effect using the display image 87AKD2 is executed, the degree of expectation that the display mode of the active display changes to red display due to the change effect is lower than in the case of the display image 87AKD3, but higher than in the case of the display image 87AKD1. get higher When the suggestion effect using the display image 87AKD1 is executed, the degree of expectation that the display mode of the active display changes to red display due to the change effect is the lowest. In this way, the suggestive effect may suggest that the display mode of the active display will change to a specific mode at different rates depending on the effect mode by displaying the effect image or the like. Also, the suggestive effect may suggest whether or not the display mode of the active display changes at a different rate depending on the effect mode by displaying the effect image or the like.

FIGS. 11-12 show an example of determining the cut-in effect. In step 87AKS105 of the effect determination process, a random value for determining the cut-in effect is extracted, and based on the random value, the cut-in effect determination table is referred to according to the final display image in the active display, thereby performing the cut-in effect. It is only necessary to determine whether or not to execute a cut-in effect, and the effect image to be used when executing. As an example of determination of the cut-in effect, there may be a case of determination example 87AK41 based on the determination ratio according to the final display image in the active display as shown in FIGS. 11-12. In decision example 87AK41, presence/absence and type of a display image to be used for cut-in effects are determined according to the final display image in the active display. When it is determined that there is no display image to be used for cut-in effect, cut-in effect is not executed. For example, when the final display image is the display image 87AKC1, it is determined that there is no display image at a rate of 80/100 (=80%), and the display image 87AKE1 is determined at a rate of 20/100 (=20%). In this case, the determination ratio of the display images 87AKE2 and 87AKE3 is 0/100 (=0%), and the cut-in effect using these display images is not executed. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC2, it is determined that there is no display image at a ratio of 20/100 (=20%), the display image 87AKE1 is determined at a ratio of 40/100 (=40%), and 30 The display image 87AKE2 is determined at a ratio of /100 (=30%), and the display image 87AKE3 is determined at a ratio of 10/100 (=10%). When the final display image is the display image 87AKC3, it is determined that there is no display image at a rate of 10/100 (=10%), the display image 87AKE1 is determined at a rate of 30/100 (=30%), and 40 The display image 87AKE2 is determined at a ratio of /100 (=40%), and the display image 87AKE3 is determined at a ratio of 20/100 (=20%).

In the determination example 87AK41, when the final display image is the display image 87AKC4, the determination ratio of no display image and display image 87AKE1 is 0/100 (=0%) and 20/100 (=20%). is determined as the display image 87AKE2, and the display image 87AKE3 is determined at a ratio of 80/100 (=80%). In this case, a cut-in effect is always executed, and one of the display images 87AKE2 and 87AKE3 is used. In this manner, the presence or absence of the cut-in effect and the display image used for the cut-in effect are determined at different ratios according to the display mode of the active display. Also, in the cut-in effect, the ratio of the final display mode in the active display differs depending on the effect mode by displaying the effect image. Therefore, for example, when the change effect is executed during the cut-in effect at the second timing, the final display mode of the active display can be suggested at different ratios according to the effect mode of the cut-in effect. In addition, when the change effect is not executed during the cut-in effect at the second timing, the effect mode of the cut-in effect can be suggested at different ratios according to the display mode of the active display.

In the determination ratio of the determination example 87AK41, the display image 87AKE3 of the cut-in effect is not determined and displayed because the determination ratio is 0/100 (=0%) when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC1. It is determinable if it is any of images 87AKC2-87AKC4. Therefore, when the effect mode of the cut-in effect becomes the predetermined mode by displaying the display image 87AKE3, the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC1, so it is possible to change the display mode of the active display. Become.

It should be noted that whether or not to perform the cut-in effect and the mode of effect may be determined at different rates depending on whether or not the change effect is to be executed and the change pattern at the time of the cut-in effect that is the second timing. For example, when the change effect is not executed at the second timing, the cut-in effect display image 87AKE1 may be determined at a high rate. According to such a determination ratio setting, when the cut-in effect using the display image 87AKE1 is executed, the ratio of the change effect not being executed at the second timing increases, and the display mode of the active display is less likely to change. Become. As described above, the cut-in effect effect mode may include a effect mode in which the execution ratio of the change effect is low and the display mode of the active display is difficult to change.

FIGS. 11-13 to 11-15 show determination examples of promotion effects corresponding to the characteristic portions 87AK to 89AK. In step 87AKS106 of the effect determination process, a random number value for determining the promotion effect is extracted, and based on the random value, according to the display result of the variable display, etc., the promotion effect determination table is referred to, so that it is used for the promotion effect. What is necessary is just to determine a production image. 11-13, the determination example 88AK01 regarding the characteristic portion 88AK shown in FIG. 11-14, and the characteristic portion 89AK shown in FIG. 11-15. At least one of the cases of determination example 89AK01 regarding . Depending on the success or failure of a specific condition related to the progress of a game or production, or according to the success or failure of a special condition irrespective of the progress of a game or production, the case of each determination example may be switched. For example, if the number of executions of variable display is within a specific range, the promotion effect may be determined by the decision ratio of decision example 87AK51, and if it is outside the specific range, the promotion effect may be decided by the decision ratio of decision example 88AK01. . Further, if the production mode is the normal mode, the promotion production is determined by the determination ratio of the determination example 87AK51, and if it is a special mode different from the normal mode, the promotion production may be determined by the determination ratio of the determination example 89AK01. .

In the decision example 87AK51 of the promotion effect related to the characteristic part 87AK shown in FIGS. The determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect differs depending on the display images used for the promotion effect. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "missing" and there is no display image corresponding to no cut-in effect execution, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 80/100 (=80%), and the display image The determination ratio of 87AKF2 is 10/100 (=10%), and the determination ratio of display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 (=10%). When the display result of the variable display is a "big hit" and there is no display image corresponding to the execution of no cut-in effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 30/100 (=30%), and the display image 87AKF2. is 30/100 (=30%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 40/100 (=40%). When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the display image 87AKE1 of the cut-in effect is displayed, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 60/100 (=60%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 60/100 (=60%). 20/100 (=20%), and the determined ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 20/100 (=20%). When the display result of the variable display is "big win" and the display image 87AKE1 of cut-in effect is displayed, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 20/100 (=20%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 20/100 (=20%). 20/100 (=20%), and the determined ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 60/100 (=60%). When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the display image 87AKE2 of the cut-in effect is displayed, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 40/100 (=40%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 40/100 (=40%). 30/100 (=30%), and the determined ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 30/100 (=30%). When the display result of the variable display is "big win" and the display image 87AKE2 of cut-in effect is displayed, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 10/100 (=10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 10/100 (=10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 80/100 (=80%). When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the display image 87AKE3 of the cut-in effect is displayed, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (=0%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 0/100 (=0%). 90/100 (=90%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 (=10%). When the display result of the variable display is "big win" and the display image 87AKE2 of cut-in effect is displayed, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (=0%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 0/100 (=0%). 10/100 (=10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 90/100 (=90%).

In the determination ratio of the determination example 87AK51, when the display result of the variable display is "fail", the determination ratio of the images other than the display image 87AKF3 is the highest regardless of whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect mode. For example, when there is no cut-in effect display image, when there is a display image 87AKE1, and when there is a display image 87AKE2, the display result of the variable display corresponds to "fail", and the display used for the promotion effect. The determination ratio of the image 87AKF1 is the highest. Further, in the case of the display image 87AKE3 of the cut-in effect, the display image 87AKE2 used for the promotion effect has the highest determination ratio corresponding to the display result of the variable display being "failed". On the other hand, in the determination ratio of the determination example 87AK51, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is the highest regardless of whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect mode. . By setting such a determination ratio, when the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF3 is executed, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big win game state becomes the highest. When the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF2 is executed, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big win game state is lower than in the case of the display image 87AKF3, but higher than in the case of the display image 87AKF1. When the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is executed, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state is the lowest. Therefore, regardless of the effect mode of the cut-in effect, the promotion effect is most likely to be controlled to the jackpot game state when the effect mode is the display of the display image 87AKF3. As a result, even if the player misses the cut-in effect, depending on whether or not the effect mode of the promotion effect is the display of the display image 87AKF3, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big win game state can be increased to some extent. can be determined up to

Due to the difference in the determination ratio in decision example 87AK51, when there is no display image corresponding to no execution of the cut-in effect, the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is performed at a higher rate than when the cut-in effect is executed. executed. When the cut-in effect using the display image 87AKE3 is executed, the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is not executed, and the promotion effect using either the display image 87AKF2 or 87AKF3 is executed. In this way, the display images used for the promotion effect are determined at different ratios depending on whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect mode. Also, in the cut-in effect, the ratio of the effect mode such as the display of the effect image in the promotion effect is changed according to the effect mode such as the display of the effect image. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the effect mode of the promotion effect at a different rate depending on whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect mode.

In the determination ratio of the determination example 87AK51, even when the display result of the variable display is the same, each of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect is determined according to whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect mode. Different percentages. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "fail" and there is no display image for which the cut-in effect is not executed, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 10/100 (=10%). Among the cases where the display result of the variable display is "fail", in the case of the display image 87AKE1 of the cut-in effect, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 20/100 (=20%). Among the cases where the display result of the variable display is "miss", in the case of the display image 87AKE2 of the cut-in effect, the ratio of determination to the display image 87AKF2 is 30/100 (=30%). Among the cases where the display result of the variable display is "fail", in the case of the display image 87AKE3 of the cut-in effect, the ratio of determination to the display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (=90%). Therefore, when the display result of the variable display is "fail", the display image 87AKE1, the display image 87AKE2, and the display image 87AKE3 of the cut-in effect no display image, the display image 87AKE1, the display image 87AKE2, and the display image 87AKE3 are displayed. Higher chance of being displayed. Similarly, if the determination ratios when the display result of the variable display is a "big hit" are compared, in this case, there is no cut-in effect display image, the display image 87AKE1, the display image 87AKE2, and the display image 87AKE3. As the effect mode of the promotion effect, the display image 87AKF3 is displayed more frequently. By setting such a determination ratio, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big win game state can be varied according to the combination of the execution/non-execution of the cut-in effect, the effect mode, and the effect mode of the promotion effect. By grasping the combination of the cut-in performance and the promotion performance, the player can recognize in detail the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state, rather than grasping only the performance mode of the promotion performance. Increased interest in various performances.

In the determination example 88AK01 of the promotion effect related to the characteristic portion 88AK shown in FIGS. The determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect differs depending on the final display image. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "fail", no change effect is executed, and the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC1, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 60/100 (=60%). ), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 40/100 (=40%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (=0%). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit", no change effect is executed, and the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC1, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 40/100 (=40%). , the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 60/100 (=60%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (=0%). Regardless of whether the display result of the variable display is "losing" or "big hit", when there is no execution of the change effect and the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC1, the display image 87AKF1, The determination ratio of 87AKF2 is 50/100 (=50%), and the determination ratio of display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (=0%).

In the decision example 88AK01, when the display result of the variable display is "losing" and the change effect is executed only at the first timing, when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC2, the display image The decision ratio of 87AKF1 is 70/100 (=70%), the decision ratio of display image 87AKF2 is 30/100 (=30%), and the decision ratio of display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (=0%). be. In the case where the display result of the variable display is a "big hit" and the change effect is executed only at the first timing, when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC2, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 40/100 (=40%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 60/100 (=60%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (=0%). When the display result of the variable display is "losing" and the change effect is executed only at the first timing, when the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC2, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 80/100 (=80%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 20/100 (=20%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (=0%). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and the change effect is executed only at the first timing, and the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC2, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 30/100 (=30%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 70/100 (=70%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (=0%).

In decision example 88AK01, when the display result of the variable display is "losing" and the change effect is executed only at the second timing, when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC3, the display image The determination ratio of 87AKF1 is 20/100 (=20%), the determination ratio of display image 87AKF2 is 50/100 (=50%), and the determination ratio of display image 87AKF3 is 30/100 (=30%). be. In the case where the display result of the variable display is a "big hit" and the change effect is executed only at the second timing, when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC3, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 20/100 (=20%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 30/100 (=30%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 50/100 (=50%). When the display result of the variable display is "losing" and the change effect is executed only at the second timing, when the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC3, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 30/100 (=30%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 50/100 (=50%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 20/100 (=20%). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and the change effect is executed only at the second timing, and the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC3, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 20/100 (=20%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 50/100 (=50%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 30/100 (=30%).

In the decision example 88AK01, when the display result of the variable display is "losing" and the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC4 , the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (=0%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (=90%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 (=10 %). Among the cases where the display result of the variable display is a "big win" and the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC4, the display image 87AKF1 is displayed. The determination ratio is 0/100 (=0%), the determination ratio of display image 87AKF2 is 10/100 (=10%), and the determination ratio of display image 87AKF3 is 90/100 (=90%). When the display result of the variable display is "losing" and the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, when the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC4, the display image 87AKF1. is 0/100 (=0%), the determination ratio of display image 87AKF2 is 95/100 (=95%), and the determination ratio of display image 87AKF3 is 5/100 (=5%). . When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, when the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC4, the display image 87AKF1. is 0/100 (=0%), the determination ratio of display image 87AKF2 is 40/100 (=40%), and the determination ratio of display image 87AKF3 is 60/100 (=60%). .

In the determination example of the determination example 88AK01, when the display result of the variable display is "losing", regardless of whether or not the change effect is executed, the timing, and the final display image in the active display, the determination ratio of the display image other than the display image 87AKF3 is be the highest. For example, when the change effect is executed only at the first timing, regardless of whether the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC2 or a display image other than the display image 87AKC2, the display result of the variable display is "loss". Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 used for promotion effect is the highest. In addition, when the change effect is executed only at the second timing, or when it is executed at the first timing and the second timing, the display result of the variable display will be "missing" regardless of the final display image of the active display. Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 used for promotion effect is the highest. On the other hand, in the determination ratio of the determination example 88AK01, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the display image 87AKF3 is determined regardless of whether or not the change effect is executed, the timing, and the final display image in the active display. highest percentage. When the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF2 is executed, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big win game state is lower than in the case of the display image 87AKF3, but higher than in the case of the display image 87AKF1. When the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is executed, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state is the lowest. Therefore, regardless of the effect mode of the change effect, the promotion effect is most likely to be controlled to the jackpot game state when the effect mode is the display of the display image 87AKF3. As a result, even if the player cannot discriminate the timing of the change performance, it is expected to be controlled to the big win game state according to whether or not the performance mode of the promotion performance is based on the display of the display image 87AKF3. degree can be determined to some extent.

Due to the difference in the determination ratio in the decision example 88AK01, when the change effect is not executed or when the change effect is executed only at the first timing, when the change effect is executed only at the second timing or at the first timing And the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is executed at a higher rate than when the change effect is executed at the second timing. When the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is not executed, and the promotion effect using either the display image 87AKF2 or 87AKF3 is executed. In this way, the display image used for the promotion effect is determined at different ratios depending on whether or not the change effect is executed and the timing. In addition, the change effect varies the ratio of the effect mode such as the display of the effect image in the promotion effect depending on whether or not it is executed and the timing. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the effect mode of the promotion effect at different ratios depending on whether or not the change effect is executed and the timing.

In the determination ratio of the determination example 88AK01, even if the display result of the variable display is the same, the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect are determined at different ratios depending on whether or not the change effect is executed and the timing. may occur. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "losing" and no change effect is executed, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 40/100 (=40%) or 50/100 (=50%). %). In the case where the display result of the variable display is "losing", when the change effect is executed only at the first timing, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 30/100 (=30%) or 20/100. (=20%). In the case where the display result of the variable display is "losing", when the change effect is executed only at the second timing, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 50/100 (=50%). In the case where the display result of the variable display is "fail", when the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (=90%) or 95/100 (=95%). Even when the display result of the variable display is a "big hit", the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 differs according to whether or not the change effect is executed and the timing. When the change effect is executed only at the first timing, the ratio determined for the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (=0%), and the display image 87AKF3 is not determined. On the other hand, when the change effect is executed only at the second timing, or when the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, the display image 87AKF3 can be determined at a predetermined ratio. By setting such a determination ratio, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big win game state can be varied according to the combination of execution/non-execution and timing of the change effect and the effect mode of the promotion effect. By grasping the combination of the change effect and the promotion effect, the player can recognize in detail the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big win game state, rather than grasping only the effect mode of the promotion effect. Interest in directing is heightened. Also, the timing at which the change effect is executed differs, such as whether or not the change effect is executed at the second timing depending on whether the promotion effect is executed in a special mode by displaying the display image 87AKF3. .

In addition, in the determination ratio of the determination example 88AK01, even if the display result of the variable display and the execution timing of the change effect are the same, the display image used for the promotion effect is determined according to the final display image of the active display. Each of 87AKF1-87AKF3 may be determined in different proportions. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "losing" and no change effect is executed, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 60/100 (=60%) when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC1. ), whereas it is 50/100 (=50%) in cases other than the display image 87AKC1. When the display result of the variable display is “losing” and the change effect is executed only at the first timing, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 70/100 ( =70%), whereas it is 80/100 (=80%) in cases other than the display image 87AKC2. When the display result of the variable display is “losing” and the change effect is executed only at the second timing, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 30/100 when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC3 = 30%), whereas it is 20/100 (= 20%) in cases other than the display image 87AKC3. When the display result of the variable display is "losing" and the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10 when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC4. /100 (=10%), whereas it is 5/100 (=5%) in cases other than the display image 87AKC4. Even when the display result of the variable display is a "big hit", even if execution/non-execution and timing of the change effect are the same, the ratio of determining the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 is different according to the final display image of the active display. . By setting such a determination ratio, it is possible to vary the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big win game state according to the combination of the display mode of the active display and the effect mode of the promotion effect. By grasping the combination of the active display and the promotion effect, the player can recognize in detail the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big win game state, rather than grasping only the effect mode of the promotion effect. Interest in directing is heightened.

In the determination example 89AK01 of the promotion effect related to the characteristic part 89AK shown in FIGS. The determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect differs depending on the display image to be displayed. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "losing" and there is no display image corresponding to no execution of the suggestive effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 80/100 (=80%), and the display image 87AKF2. is 10/100 (=10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 (=10%). When the display result of the variable display is "big win" and there is no display image corresponding to no execution of the suggestive effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 30/100 (=30%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 30/100 (=30%). The determination ratio is 30/100 (=30%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 40/100 (=40%). When the display result of the variable display is "no" and the display image 87AKD1 of the suggestive effect is displayed, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 60/100 (=60%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 20. /100 (=20%), and the determined ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 20/100 (=20%). When the display result of the variable display is "big win" and the display image 87AKD1 of the suggestive effect is displayed, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 20/100 (=20%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 20. /100 (=20%), and the determined ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 60/100 (=60%). When the display result of the variable display is “no” and the display image 87AKD2 of the suggestive effect is the display image 87AKF1, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 40/100 (=40%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 30. /100 (=30%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 30/100 (=30%). When the display result of the variable display is "big win" and the display image 87AKD2 of the suggestive effect is displayed, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 10/100 (=10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 10. /100 (=10%), and the determined ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 80/100 (=80%). When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the display image 87AKD3 of the suggestive effect is displayed, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (=0%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 90. /100 (=90%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 (=10%). When the display result of the variable display is "big win" and the display image 87AKE2 of cut-in effect is displayed, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (=0%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 0/100 (=0%). 10/100 (=10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 90/100 (=90%).

In the determination ratio of the determination example 89AK01, when the display result of the variable display is "losing", the determination ratio of the display image other than the display image 87AKF3 is the highest regardless of whether or not the suggestive effect is executed and the effect mode. For example, when there is no display image of the suggestive effect, when the display image is 87AKD1, and when it is the display image 87AKD2, the display result of the variable display corresponds to "failure", and the display image used for the promotion effect. The determination ratio of 87AKF1 is the highest. In the case of the display image 87AKD3 of the suggestive effect, the display image 87AKE2 used for the promotional effect has the highest determination ratio, corresponding to the display result of the variable display being "missing". On the other hand, in the determination ratio of the determination example 89AK01, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is the highest regardless of whether or not the suggestive effect is executed and the effect mode. By setting such a determination ratio, when the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF3 is executed, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big win game state becomes the highest. When the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF2 is executed, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big win game state is lower than in the case of the display image 87AKF3, but higher than in the case of the display image 87AKF1. When the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is executed, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state is the lowest. Therefore, regardless of the effect mode of the suggestive effect, in the case of the effect mode by displaying the display image 87AKF3, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big win game state is the highest. As a result, even if the player misses the suggestive performance, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big win game state can be increased to some extent according to whether the performance mode of the promotion performance is based on the display of the display image 87AKF3. can be determined.

Due to the difference in the determination ratio in the decision example 89AK01, when there is no display image corresponding to no execution of the suggestive effect, the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is executed at a higher rate than when the suggestive effect is executed. be. When the suggestion effect using the display image 87AKD3 is executed, the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is not executed, and the promotion effect using either the display image 87AKF2 or 87AKF3 is executed. In this manner, the display images used for the promotion effect are determined at different ratios depending on whether or not the suggestive effect is executed and the effect mode. In the suggestive effect, the ratio of the effect mode such as the display of the effect image in the promotion effect is changed according to the effect mode such as the display of the effect image. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the effect mode of the promotion effect at a different ratio depending on whether or not the suggestive effect is executed and the effect mode.

In the determination ratio of the determination example 89AK01, even when the display result of the variable display is the same, the ratio at which each of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect is determined according to whether or not the suggestive effect is executed and the effect mode. is different. For example, in the case where the display result of the variable display is “no” and there is no display image for which the suggestive effect is not executed, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 10/100 (=10%). In the case where the display result of the variable display is "no", in the case of the display image 87AKD1 of the suggestive effect, the ratio of determination to the display image 87AKF2 is 20/100 (=20%). Among the cases where the display result of the variable display is "miss", in the case of the display image 87AKD2 of the suggestive effect, the ratio of determination to the display image 87AKF2 is 30/100 (=30%). Among the cases where the display result of the variable display is “no”, in the case of the display image 87AKD3 of the suggestive effect, the ratio of determination to the display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (=90%). Therefore, when the display result of the variable display is "losing", the display image 87AKD1, the display image 87AKD2, and the display image 87AKD3 are displayed as the display image 87AKF2 as the promotion mode. becomes more likely. Similarly, if the determination ratios when the display result of the variable display is a "big hit" are compared, in this case, there is no display image of the suggestive effect, the display image 87AKD1, the display image 87AKD2, and the display image 87AKD3. As the effect mode of the effect, the display image 87AKF3 is displayed more frequently. By setting such a determination ratio, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big win game state can be varied according to the combination of the execution/non-execution of the suggestive effect, the effect mode, and the effect mode of the promotion effect. By grasping the combination of the suggestive effect and the promotional effect, the player can recognize in detail the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state, rather than grasping only the effect mode of the promotional effect. Interest in directing is heightened.

FIGS. 11 to 16 show an example of determination of the promotion effect as a modified example. For example, when the display image 87AKE3 of the cut-in effect is selected from among the determination example 87AK51 of the promotion effect related to the characteristic part 87AK, the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect are displayed at a rate corresponding to the set value in the pachinko game machine 1. You may decide to either In step 87AKS106 of the effect determination process, when the effect mode of the cut-in effect is the effect mode by displaying the display image 87AKE3, as an example of determination of the promotion effect according to the set value in the pachinko game machine 1, as shown in FIGS. It suffices if there is a case where the decision example 87AK61 shown is obtained.

In the promotion effect determination example 87AK61 shown in FIGS. Regardless, the determination ratio of display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (=0%), the determination ratio of display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (=90%), and the determination ratio of display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 ( = 10%). On the other hand, in the case of the display image 87AKE3 of the cut-in effect, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the display image used for promotion effect according to the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 The determined proportions of 87AKF1-87AKF3 are different. In such a case, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is the same at 0/100 (=0%), while the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 35/100 (=35%) if the set value is 1. ), 30/100 (=30%) if the set value is 2, 25/100 (=25%) if the set value is 3, and 20/100 if the set value is 4. (=20%), if the set value is 5, it is 15/100 (=15%), and if the set value is 6, it is 10/100 (=10%). Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 65/100 (=65%) when the setting value is 1, and 70/100 (=70%) when the setting value is 2. If the setting value is 3, it is 75/100 (=75%), if the setting value is 4, it is 80/100 (=80%), and if the setting value is 5, it is 85/100 (=85%). ), and if the set value is 6, it is 90/100 (=90%).

In the determination ratio of the determination example 87AK61, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the ratio of the effect mode of the promotion effect to display either the display image 87AKF2 or 87AKF3 is set to the pachinko game. It is made different according to the setting value in the machine 1. FIG. For example, when the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the effect mode of the promotion effect tends to be the effect mode by displaying the display image 87AKF2, and as the set value increases, the effect mode of the promotion effect changes to that of the display image 87AKF3. The ratio of the mode of presentation by display is increased. Therefore, when the effect mode of the cut-in effect is the display of the display image 87AKE3, and the promotion effect is the effect mode of displaying the display image 87AKF3, the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is advantageous to the player. Expectations, which are set values, increase.

The effect mode of the promotion effect is the effect mode as a predetermined mode in which the message "Super heat!!" is notified by displaying the display image 87AKF3. The rate at which the performance mode of the promotion performance becomes such a predetermined mode can be grasped by repeatedly executing the cut-in performance and the promotion performance in accordance with a plurality of times of variable display in which the display result is "big hit". The player can adjust the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 by grasping the ratio of the promotion effect to a predetermined mode when the display image 87AKE3 of the cut-in effect is displayed in the variable display in which the display result is a "big hit". recognizable. If the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is a set value with a high degree of advantage, the display result of the variable display is likely to be "big win" and is likely to be controlled to the big win game state. Therefore, a player who expects to receive a game value such as winning a prize ball expects that the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a set value with a high degree of advantage. In the variable display of (1), by making it possible to recognize the setting value from the ratio at which the promotion effect is in a predetermined mode, etc., the desire to play the game is heightened.

Even if there is no display image used for the cut-in effect or if the display image is one of the display images 87AKE1 and 87AKE2, the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect are displayed according to the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1. may be determined differently. Even when the display result of the variable display is “losing”, the determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect may differ according to the set value in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "losing", the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is set to increase as the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 becomes a set value with a higher degree of advantage for the player. may According to such a setting, after the display image 87AKF3 is displayed, the display result of the variable display is more likely to be "failed" after the promotion effect in the predetermined mode (large V-con display) with a high degree of expectation is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation that the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is a highly advantageous set value. Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display is "losing", it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the set value, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Of the determination example 88AK01 of the promotion effect related to the characteristic part 88AK, for example, when the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing and the final display image of the active display is 87AKC4, the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 The determined ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect may differ depending on the situation. For example, when the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, and the final display image of the active display is 87AKC4, when the display result of the variable display is "losing", the pachinko game machine 1 Regardless of the set values, the determination ratio of display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (=0%), the determination ratio of display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (=90%), and the determination ratio of display image 87AKF3 is 10. /100 (=10%). On the other hand, when the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, and the final display image of the active display is 87AKC4, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the display image 87AKF1 is displayed. is the same at 0/100 (=0%). 30/100 (=30%) if the set value is 3, 25/100 (=25%) if the set value is 4, and 20/100 (=20%) if the set value is 4. If the value is 5, it may be 15/100 (=15%), and if the set value is 6, it may be 10/100 (=10%). Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 65/100 (=65%) when the setting value is 1, and 70/100 (=70%) when the setting value is 2. If the setting value is 3, it is 75/100 (=75%), if the setting value is 4, it is 80/100 (=80%), and if the setting value is 5, it is 85/100 (=85%). ), and if the set value is 6, it may be 90/100 (=90%). By setting such a determination ratio, for example, when the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the effect mode of the promotion effect is likely to be the effect mode by displaying the display image 87AKF2, and as the set value increases, the effect mode of the promotion effect is increased. The ratio of the effect mode to the effect mode by displaying the display image 87AKF3 is increased. Therefore, when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC4 by executing the change effect at the first timing and the second timing, the promotion effect is the effect mode by displaying the display image 87AKF3. , the expectation that the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is an advantageous set value for the player increases. In addition, if the player can grasp the rate at which the promotion effect is in a predetermined mode by repeatedly executing the changing effect and the promotion effect with a plurality of variable displays in which the display result is "big hit", the pachinko game machine 1 Since the set value in can be recognized, the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.

Note that even when the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC4 among the cases where the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, the promotion effect is performed according to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The determination ratios of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the display may be different. Even when the display result of the variable display is “losing”, the determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect may differ according to the set value in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "losing", the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is set to increase as the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 becomes a set value with a higher degree of advantage for the player. may According to such a setting, after the display image 87AKF3 is displayed, the display result of the variable display is more likely to be "failed" after the promotion effect in the predetermined mode (large V-con display) with high expectation is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation that the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is a highly advantageous set value. Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display is "losing", it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the set value, thereby improving the interest in the game. In addition, display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF1 to be used for the promotion effect according to the set values in the pachinko game machine 1 even when the change effect is not executed, or when the change effect is executed only at the first timing or only at the second timing. The determination ratio of 87AKF3 may be different.

Among the determination example 89AK01 of the promotion effect related to the characteristic portion 89AK, for example, when the display image 87AKD3 of the suggestive effect is, according to the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, the determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect may be different. For example, in the case of the display image 87AKD3 of the suggestive effect, if the display result of the variable display is "losing", regardless of the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 ( = 0%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (=90%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 (=10%). On the other hand, in the case of the display image 87AKD3 of the suggestive effect, in the case where the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is the same at 0/100 (=0%). The determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 35/100 (=35%) if the set value is 1, 30/100 (=30%) if the set value is 2, and 3 If the If the set value is 6, it may be 10/100 (=10%). Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 65/100 (=65%) when the setting value is 1, and 70/100 (=70%) when the setting value is 2. If the setting value is 3, it is 75/100 (=75%), if the setting value is 4, it is 80/100 (=80%), and if the setting value is 5, it is 85/100 (=85%). ), and if the set value is 6, it may be 90/100 (=90%). By setting such a determination ratio, for example, when the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the effect mode of the promotion effect is likely to be the effect mode by displaying the display image 87AKF2, and as the set value increases, the effect mode of the promotion effect is increased. The ratio of the effect mode to the effect mode by displaying the display image 87AKF3 is increased. Therefore, when the effect mode of the suggestive effect is the display of the display image 87AKD3, and the promotion effect is the effect mode of displaying the display image 87AKF3, the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is set to be advantageous to the player. Expectations, which are values, increase. In addition, if the player can grasp the rate at which the promotional effect is in a predetermined mode by repeatedly executing the suggestive effect and the promoting effect in accordance with the variable display a plurality of times in which the display result is "big hit", the pachinko game machine 1 can be used. Since the set value in can be recognized, the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.

It should be noted that even when there is no display image used for the suggestive effect, or when the display image is either of the display images 87AKD1 and 87AKD2, the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect are selected according to the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The decision ratio may be different. Even when the display result of the variable display is “losing”, the determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect may differ according to the set value in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "losing", the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is set to increase as the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 becomes a set value with a higher degree of advantage for the player. may According to such a setting, after the display image 87AKF3 is displayed, the display result of the variable display is more likely to be "failed" after the promotion effect in the predetermined mode (large V-con display) with a high degree of expectation is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation that the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is a highly advantageous set value. Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display is "losing", it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the set value, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Determination ratio of display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC3 to be the final display image of active display, determination ratio of change patterns 87AKP1-1 to 87AKP1-6 corresponding to a plurality of timings, presence/absence of suggestive effects and determination ratio of display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3, Among the decision ratios of the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3 used for the cut-in effect, the decision ratio of the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3, and the decision ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect, the display result of the variable display is "loss" for some or all of the decision ratios. may be set differently according to the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "losing", the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 has a high degree of advantage for the player in terms of the ratio of the control to the jackpot game state, which is determined in the performance mode with a high degree of expectation. It may be set so as to increase as the set value increases. According to such setting, after the execution of the high-expectation effect which is the effect of the effect mode with a high degree of expectation, the display result of the variable display becomes "losing". It is possible to increase the expectation that the set value is a set value with a high degree of advantage. In general, when the display result of the variable display is "lost" after the high-expectation effect of the effect mode with the high expectation is executed, the player's sense of expectation, which has been once heightened by the effect, is variably displayed. , the player's desire to continue playing the game is likely to decrease or be lost. On the other hand, after the high-expectation effect is executed, as the display result of the variable display becomes "losing", the expectation that the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is a set value with a high degree of advantage increases. By increasing it, the game interest can be improved so that the player is motivated to continue playing the game.

In addition, the determination ratio of the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC3 that will be the final display image of the active display, the determination ratio of the change patterns 87AKP1-1 to 87AKP1-6 corresponding to a plurality of timings, the presence or absence of suggestive effects, and the determination of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3. Of the ratio, whether there is a cut-in effect, the determined ratio of the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3, and the determined ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect, the display result of the variable display is "missing" for some or all of the determined ratios. , the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 may be set differently depending on whether it is equal to or greater than a specific set value or when it is less than a specific set value. For example, when the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4 or more, the expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher when the display result of the variable display is "losing" than when the set value is less than 4. A higher determination ratio may be used. Alternatively, for example, when the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, it is controlled to a jackpot game state when the display result of the variable display is "losing" rather than when it is other than 6 (one of 1 to 5). A determination ratio of a performance mode with a high degree of expectation to be performed may be increased. When the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 6 (one of 1 to 5), the decision ratio is 0/100 (=0%) and a big hit when the display result of the variable display is "losing". When the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the effect mode to be determined may be set to be determined at a predetermined ratio when the display result of the variable display is "loss". According to this setting, when the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 6 (any one of 1 to 5), the display result of the variable display becomes "losing" while the performance of the performance mode in which the big win is confirmed is executed. If so, the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is determined to be 6, so that the game interest can be improved so that the player's motivation to continue playing the game can be heightened.

In addition, according to the set value in the pachinko game machine 1, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios. For example, in the case of a specific set value, setting suggestion effects may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of a set value other than the specific set value. In this case, in a range where the set value is other than the specific set value, there is provided a limit as a limit that the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range where the set value is the specific set value. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate when the specific set value is set and is not executed when the set value is other than the specific set value. In this manner, within a range where the set value is the specific set value, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, a limitation is provided as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed in a range where the set value is other than the specific set value.

Depending on whether it is a special period or not, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios. For example, in the case of the special period, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of the period other than the special period. In this case, in a period other than the special period, a limitation is provided as a limit that the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the special period. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate in the special period and is not executed in the period other than the special period. In this manner, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate within the special period. On the other hand, within a period other than the special period, there is a limitation as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

Depending on whether or not an arbitrary special condition is satisfied, regardless of whether it is a special period or not, arbitrary setting suggestion effects may be executed at different ratios. For example, when the special condition is established, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the special condition is not established. In this case, in the range where the special condition is not satisfied, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range where the special condition is satisfied. A setting suggestion performance may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate when the special condition is met and is not executed when the special condition is not met. In this way, within the range where the special condition is satisfied, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, in the range in which the special condition is not established, there is provided a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed. The special condition may be any condition that can be established according to the progress or history of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the result of judgment or decision of the game, or the progress or history of the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the performance. It may be any condition that can be established according to the determination or determination of. It is not limited to setting suggesting effects, and arbitrary effects may be executable at different rates depending on whether or not a preset condition is met, or whether such a condition is met. The effect mode may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not the condition is satisfied, or the execution timing may be determined at a different rate depending on whether such a condition is satisfied. . In addition, an arbitrary effect may be limited as a limit that a specific effect is not executed in the range where the preset limit condition is satisfied, or compared with the range where the limit condition is not satisfied. A limit may be provided as a limit that the execution rate is lowered and execution is difficult.

FIG. 11-17 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process as the effect process during variable display. In the effect processing during variable display, it is determined whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed (step 87AKS041). In step 87AKS041, for example, the timer value of the production control process timer is updated (for example, 1 subtraction), and when the end code is read from the production control pattern corresponding to the production control process timer value after the update, variable display It should be determined that the time has passed. Thus, the lapse of the variable display time, based on the timer value of the effect control process timer, etc., if it can be determined as the lapse of the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern.

When the variable display time has not elapsed in step 87AKS041 (step 87AKS041; No), it is determined whether or not it is a suggestive effect period for executing a suggestive effect (step 87AKS042). The suggestive effect period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern (suggestive effect control pattern) determined in step 87AKS023 of the variable display start setting process, for example. If it is the suggestive effect period (step 87AKS042; Yes), control is performed to execute the suggestive effect (step 87AKS043). At step 87AKS043, for example, various commands created based on the setting of the suggestive effect control pattern are transmitted to the display control section 123, the voice control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. As a result, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are lit, blinked, or extinguished. or by combining some or all of them, it is sufficient that the suggestive effect can be executed by a predetermined effect device.

When it is determined in step 87AKS042 that it is not the suggested effect period (step 87AKS042; No), or after executing the control in step 87AKS043, it is determined whether or not it is the change effect period for executing the change effect. (step 87AKS044). The change effect period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern (change effect control pattern) determined in step 87AKS023 of the variable display start setting process, for example. When it is the change effect period (step 87AKS044; Yes), control for executing the change effect is performed (step 87AKS045). As the change effect period, for example, a period before establishment of the ready-to-win effect, which is the first timing, and a period during the cut-in effect, which is the second timing, may be set in advance. During the cut-in effect at the second timing, it is sufficient if the display mode of the active display can be changed by changing the display of the effect image in the active display area 87AKA1 corresponding to the execution of the cut-in effect.

When it is determined in step 87AKS044 that it is not the change effect period (step 87AKS044; No), or after executing the control in step 87AKS045, it is determined whether or not it is the ready-to-win effect period for executing the ready-to-win effect. (step 87AKS046). Reach production period, for example in the production control pattern (special figure fluctuation time production control pattern) determined in step 87AKS023 of the variable display start setting process, it may be determined in advance. When it is the ready-to-win effect period (step 87AKS046; Yes), control for executing the ready-to-win effect is performed (step 87AKS047).

When it is determined at step 87AKS046 that it is not the ready-to-win effect period (step 87AKS046; No), and after executing the control at step 87AKS047, it is determined whether it is the cut-in effect period for executing the cut-in effect. is determined (step 87AKS048). The cut-in effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (cut-in effect control pattern) determined in step 87AKS023 of the variable display start setting process. If it is the cut-in effect period (step 87AKS048; Yes), control is performed to execute the cut-in effect (step 87AKS049). The cut-in effect period is after step 87AKS026 of the variable display start setting process starts display of a effect image that becomes active display with the start of variable display, and before step 87AKS052 determines that it is an action effect period. In addition, it is only necessary to set in advance so that the cut-in effect can be executed. With such a setting, it is sufficient that the cut-in effect can be executed after the active display is displayed and before the action effect is executed.

Note that the order of the active display, action effect, and cut-in effect may be changed arbitrarily. For example, the active display may be started after executing the cut-in effect, and then the action effect may be executed. Alternatively, the action effect may be executed after the active display is started, and then the cut-in effect may be executed.

When it is determined in step 87AKS048 that it is not the cut-in effect period (step 87AKS048; No), or after executing the control in step 87AKS049, it is determined whether or not it is the promotion effect period for executing the promotion effect. Determine (step 87AKS050). The promotion effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (cut-in effect control pattern) determined in step 87AKS023 of the variable display start setting process. If it is the promotion effect period (step 87AKS050; Yes), control for executing the promotion effect is performed (step 87AKS051). The promotion effect period may be an effective detection period for effectively detecting the action of the player as the promotion effect is executed. In the valid detection period, for example, it is possible to detect the action of the player tilting the operating rod of the stick controller 31A, such as the pulling operation on the V controller, based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A.

When it is determined in step 87AKS050 that it is not the promotion performance period (step 87AKS050; No), or after executing the control in step 87AKS051, it is determined whether or not it is the action presentation period for executing the action presentation. (step 87AKS052). The operation production period may be predetermined in the production control pattern (special figure fluctuation time production control pattern) determined at step 87AKS023 of the variable display start setting process, for example. It should be noted that, in the effective detection period after the start of the promotion effect, if a specific action by the player, such as an action of pulling the operating rod of the stick controller 31A, which is the V controller, is not detected, the action effect period is terminated. It may not be started. Alternatively, even if the specific action is not detected, the action presentation period may be started when the specific timing for the action presentation is reached. When it is the action presentation period (step 87AKS052; Yes), control for executing the action presentation is performed (step 87AKS053).

The player's specific action detected for executing the action effect may be an action of tilting the operating rod of the stick controller 31A, unlike a pulling operation, such as a pushing operation on the V-controller. Alternatively, the specific action of the player may be an action of pressing the push button 31B. Not limited to those that can detect player's actions, for example, based on the detection result of any change or difference in the detection target, such as the execution state of processing or control in the detection target, changes in the shape, pattern, or color of the detection target Alternatively, any effect corresponding to the action effect may be executable. A detection device capable of detecting motion, change, difference, etc. in a detection target, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detects the state of the detection target. Any configuration that can be detected will suffice. Alternatively, the state of the detection target may be detected by analyzing the result of photographing the detection target using a predetermined camera (video motion capture). As an example of detecting the state of the detection target using a camera, the screen display state of the mobile terminal may be detected, and an effect may be executed based on the detection result.

When it is determined in step 87AKS052 that it is not the operation production period (step 87AKS052; No), after executing the control in step 87AKS053, for example, the setting in the production control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern Based on this, control is performed to execute other effects during variable display including the variable display operation of decorative patterns (step 87AKS054), and the process during variable display ends.

When the variable display time has passed at step 87AKS041 (step 87AKS041; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination command transmitted from the main substrate 11 has been received (step 87AKS055). At this time, if the symbol confirmation command is not received (step 87AKS055; No), the effect processing during variable display is terminated and the game waits. After the variable display time elapses, if a predetermined time elapses without receiving the design confirmation command, predetermined error processing is executed in response to the fact that the design confirmation command could not be received normally. You may do so.

When the pattern confirmation command is received at step 87AKS055 (step 87AKS055; Yes), for example, a predetermined display control command is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123, etc. In the variable display of the decorative pattern Control for deriving and displaying the final stop pattern (determined ornamental pattern) as a display result is performed (step 87AKS056). At this time, a predetermined fixed time is set as a wait time for receiving the jackpot start designation command (step 87AKS057). Also, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3" corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step 87AKS058), the effect process during variable display is terminated.

11-18 to 11-22 show execution examples of variable display of decorative patterns and various effects. FIGS. 11-18 show an execution example from the start of the variable display, which is the start of the variable display, to the execution of the suggestive effect corresponding to the first timing before the establishment of the ready-to-win state. Figure 11-19 shows that after the change effect corresponding to the first timing before reaching the reach is executed, the variable display ends in the case of non-reach (loss) FIG. 11 shows an example of execution of reach formation in which the variable display is in a reach mode. Fig. 11-20 shows an execution example of variable end where variable display is ended in the case of normal (losing), and the second timing from super development to cut-in performance where super ready reach effect is started. It shows an execution example until the suggestive effect is executed. FIG. 11-21 shows an execution example in which the promotion effect is executed after the change effect corresponding to the second timing of the cut-in effect is executed. FIG. 11-22 shows an example of execution from the execution of the action effect to the end of the variable display, which is the end of the variable display.

In the effect determination process executed in step 87AKS022 of the variable display start setting process in response to the start of the variable display in the effect execution example 87AKM01 shown in FIG. , the change pattern of the change effect, the effect mode of the suggestive effect, the effect mode of the cut-in effect, the operation mode of the promotion effect, and the like are determined. After the start of variation in the effect execution example 87 AKM01, a suggestive effect suggesting that the display mode of the active display will change can be executed in correspondence with the first timing before establishment of the ready-to-win state. FIG. 11-18(B1) shows an effect execution example 87AKM11 when a suggestive effect is executed by displaying the display image 87AKD1 corresponding to the first timing. FIG. 11-18(B2) shows an effect execution example 87AKM12 when the suggestive effect is executed by displaying the display image 87AKD2 corresponding to the first timing. FIG. 11-18 (B3) shows an effect execution example 87AKM13 when the suggestive effect is executed by displaying the display image 87AKD3 corresponding to the first timing. In this manner, the suggestive effect can be executed in one of a plurality of effect modes depending on which one of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 is used. Of the cases in which the change effect is not executed corresponding to the first timing, when it is determined in step 87AKS103 of the effect determination process that the false suggestive effect is not executed, the suggestive effect is not executed. The variable display of the decoration pattern progresses. Corresponding to before establishment of ready-to-win which is the first timing, after the suggestive effect in any one of the effect execution examples 87AKM11 to 87AKM13 is executed, the change effect may or may not be executed. Of these, when the change effect is executed, the display mode of the active display can be changed according to the change pattern of the first timing determined in step 87AKS103 of the effect determination process.

FIG. 11-19 (A1) shows an effect execution example 87AKM21 when no change effect is executed in response to no change pattern at the first timing. Since the display image 87AKC1 is displayed in the active display area 87AKA1 of the effect execution example 87AKM21, the display mode of the active display remains white. In this case, the suggestive effect in any of the effect execution examples 87AKM11 to 87AKM13 is a fake suggestive effect executed when there is no change effect. However, in the determination example 87AKM32 shown in FIG. 11-11(B), if the suggestive effect by displaying the display image 87AKD3 like the effect execution example 87AKM13 is executed, the change patterns 87AKP1-1 to 87AKP1- Since it is determined to be one of 6, there is no false suggestive effect.

FIG. 11-19 (A2) shows an effect execution example 87AKM22 when the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-1 is executed corresponding to the first timing. By displaying the display image 87AKC2 in the active display area 87AKA1 of the effect execution example 87AKM22, the display mode of the active display changes to blue display. FIG. 11-19 (A3) shows an effect execution example 87AKM23 when a change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-2 is executed corresponding to the first timing. By displaying the display image 87AKC3 in the active display area 87AKA1 of the effect execution example 87AKM23, the display mode of the active display changes to green display. FIG. 11-19 (A4) shows an effect execution example 87AKM24 when a change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-3 is executed corresponding to the first timing. By displaying the display image 87AKC4 in the active display area 87AKA1 of the effect execution example 87AKM24, the display mode of the active display changes to red display.

After the variable display of the effect execution example 87AKM01 is started and before the ready-to-win is established as the first timing, a suggestive effect by displaying any one of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 as in the effect execution examples 87AKM11 to 87AKM13 is performed. After execution, in the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-1, a display image 87AKC2 like the effect execution example 87AKM22 is displayed in the active display area 87AKA1, thereby changing the display mode of the active display to blue display. After the variable display of the effect execution example 87AKM01 is started and before the ready-to-win is established as the first timing, a suggestive effect by displaying any one of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 as in the effect execution examples 87AKM11 to 87AKM13 is performed. After execution, in the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-2, a display image 87AKC3 like the effect execution example 87AKM23 is displayed in the active display area 87AKA1, thereby changing the display mode of the active display to green display. After the variable display of the effect execution example 87AKM01 is started and before the ready-to-win is established as the first timing, a suggestive effect by displaying any one of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 as in the effect execution examples 87AKM11 to 87AKM13 is performed. After execution, in the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-3, the display image 87AKC4 like the effect execution example 87AKM24 is displayed in the active display area 87AKA1, thereby changing the display mode of the active display to red display.

In the case of the effect execution example 87AKM21, in the variable display by the non-reach variation pattern, for example, fixed decorative patterns of the non-reach combination such as the effect execution example 87AKM31 shown in FIG. 11-19 (B1) are stopped and displayed. The display result of the display is derived and terminated. In the case of the effect execution example 87AKM21, in the variable display by the variation pattern other than the non-reach variation pattern, for example, as in the effect execution example 87AKM32 shown in FIG. , reach is established. After establishment of ready-to-win, there are a case where a ready-to-win effect of normal reach is executed and the variable display ends, and a case of super development in which a ready-to-win effect of becoming super ready-to-win is executed.

FIG. 11-20 (A1) shows a variable end effect execution example 87AKM41 in which the variable display ends when the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach is executed, the fixed decoration pattern of the ready-to-win combination is stopped and displayed. . FIG. 11-20 (A2) shows an example 87AKM42 of super-expansion effect execution in which a ready-to-win effect of normal reach develops into a ready-to-win effect of super-reach. When the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is executed as in effect execution example 87 AKM42, the decorative patterns in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R may be displayed in reduced size. . Also, a small pattern display area may be arranged at a predetermined position on the screen of the image display device 5 . The small pattern display area is smaller than the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, and is provided at a predetermined position such as the lower right portion on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. there is In the small pattern display area, the small patterns are variably displayed corresponding to the variable display of the special patterns and decorative patterns. The effect image showing the small pattern is reduced in size as compared with the identification information image which is the effect image showing the decorative pattern, and can be displayed in a variable manner in a manner that is partially or wholly common to each of the identification information images showing the decorative pattern. A reduced identification information image may be used. For example, if the identification information image showing the decorative pattern includes a part showing a number and a part showing a character, the effect image showing the small pattern corresponds to the same pattern number as the part showing the number included in the decorative pattern. Since this is an image showing a number and does not include a part showing a character, it is sufficient if the small pattern can be displayed in a simpler manner than the effect image showing the decorative pattern. In this way, in the small pattern display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the small patterns that serve as the reduced identification information are variably displayed, and the determined small patterns that are the display results are derived. The effect image showing the small pattern may be displayed at a position that is always visible. In the small symbol display area, it is sufficient to display the small symbols in a simple manner so that the display contents and display results of the small symbols can be prevented from being misunderstood by the player.

Following the super development in the effect execution example 87AKM42, the ready-to-win effect that becomes super ready-to-win can proceed like the effect execution example 87AKM43 shown in FIG. 11-20(B). After the ready-to-win effect in the effect execution example 87 AKM43, the display mode of the active display is changed with or without execution of the cut-in effect corresponding to the cut-in effect at the second timing. A suggestive production that suggests is made executable. FIG. 11-20(C1) shows an effect execution example 87AKM51 in which a suggestive effect is executed by displaying the display image 87AKD1 corresponding to the second timing when the cut-in effect is not executed. Even if the cut-in effect is not executed by determining that there is no display image to be used for the cut-in effect in step 87AKS105 of the effect determination process, the suggestive effect corresponding to the second timing is displayed in step 87AKS103 of the effect determination process. When the image is determined, the suggestion performance can be executed even if the cut-in performance is not executed during the cut-in performance at the second timing. FIG. 11-20(C2) shows an effect execution example 87AKM52 in which when the cut-in effect is executed by displaying the display image 87AKE2, the suggestive effect by displaying the display image 87AKD2 is executed corresponding to the second timing. ing. FIG. 11-20(C3) shows an effect execution example 87AKM53 in which when the cut-in effect is executed by displaying the display image 87AKE3, the suggestive effect by displaying the display image 87AKD3 is executed corresponding to the second timing. ing. After the suggestive effect in any of the effect execution examples 87AKM51 to 87AKM53 is executed corresponding to the cut-in effect that is the second timing, the change effect is executed. At this time, the display mode of the active display can be changed according to the change pattern of the second timing determined in step 87AKS103 of the effect determination process.

FIG. 11-21 (A1) shows an effect execution example 87AKM61 when the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-1 is executed corresponding to the second timing. By displaying the display image 87AKC2 in the active display area 87AKA1 of the effect execution example 87AKM62, the display mode of the active display changes to blue display. FIG. 11-21 (A2) shows an effect execution example 87AKM62 when the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-2 is executed corresponding to the second timing. By displaying the display image 87AKC3 in the active display area 87AKA1 of the effect execution example 87AKM62, the display mode of the active display changes to green display. FIG. 11-21 (A3) shows an effect execution example 87AKM63 when the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-3 is executed corresponding to the second timing. By displaying the display image 87AKC4 in the active display area 87AKA1 of the effect execution example 87AKM63, the display mode of the active display changes to red display.

After the start of the ready-to-reach effect that becomes super reach like the effect execution examples 87AKM42 and 87AKM43, at the time of the cut-in effect that is the second timing, any of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 is displayed as in the effect execution examples 87AKM51 to 87AKM53. After executing the suggestive effect by displaying , in the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-1, the display image 87AKC2 such as the effect execution example 87AKM61 is displayed in the active display area 87AKA1, thereby displaying the active display. The aspect changes to blue display. After the start of the ready-to-reach effect that becomes super reach like the effect execution examples 87AKM42 and 87AKM43, at the time of the cut-in effect that is the second timing, any of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 is displayed as in the effect execution examples 87AKM51 to 87AKM53. After executing the suggestion effect by displaying , in the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-2, the display image 87AKC3 like the effect execution example 87AKM62 is displayed in the active display area 87AKA1, thereby displaying the active display. The aspect changes to green display. After the start of the ready-to-reach effect that becomes super reach like the effect execution examples 87AKM42 and 87AKM43, at the time of the cut-in effect that is the second timing, any of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 is displayed as in the effect execution examples 87AKM51 to 87AKM53. After executing the suggestive effect by displaying , in the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-3, the display image 87AKC4 such as the effect execution example 87AKM63 is displayed in the active display area 87AKA1, thereby displaying the active display. The aspect changes to red display. After part or all of the cut-in effect, suggestive effect, and change effect corresponding to the second timing are executed, or after the ready-to-win effect progresses without these effects being executed, the action of the player is promoted. A promotion effect is executed.

FIG. 11-21(B1) shows an effect execution example 87AKM71 in which the promotion effect by displaying the display image 87AKF1 is executed following the effect execution example 87AKM63. FIG. 11-21(B2) shows an effect execution example 87AKM72 in which the promotion effect by displaying the display image 87AKF2 is executed following the effect execution example 87AKM63. FIG. 11-21(B3) shows an effect execution example 87AKM73 in which the promotion effect by displaying the display image 87AKF3 is executed following the effect execution example 87AKM63. After the cut-in effect, which is the second timing, the promotion effect is executed in the effect mode of the small V-con display by displaying the display image 87AKF1 like the effect execution example 87AKM71, and the effect execution example 87AKM72. When the promotion effect is executed in the effect mode of medium V-con display by displaying the display image 87AKF2, the promotion effect is executed in the effect mode of large V-con display by displaying the display image 87AKF3 like the effect execution example 87AKM73. There are cases. In step 87AKS106 of the effect determination process, the determination example 87AK51 of the promotion effect related to the feature part 87AK, the determination example 88AK01 of the promotion effect related to the feature part 88AK, the determination example 89AK01 of the promotion effect related to the feature part 89AK, etc. Any one of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 to be used for promotion effect is determined by a ratio. With the execution of the promotion effect, it becomes an effective detection period for effectively detecting the action of the player. During the effective detection period, it is made possible to detect an action of the player tilting the operating rod of the stick controller 31A, such as a pulling operation on the V controller. An action effect can be executed based on the result of detecting the action of the player during the validity detection period.

FIG. 11-22(A1) shows an effect execution example 87AKM81 when the action effect is executed corresponding to the display result of the variable display being "missing". In this case, the display result of the variable display is derived by stop-displaying the fixed decoration pattern that becomes the reach-losing, such as the effect execution example 87AKM91 shown in FIG.

FIG. 11-22(A2) shows an effect execution example 87AKM82 when the action effect is executed corresponding to the display result of the variable display being "big win". In this case, for example, the fixed decoration pattern of the big hit combination such as the effect execution example 87AKM92 shown in FIG.

In this way, the promotion effect that promotes the action of the player includes execution/non-execution and effect mode of the cut-in effect, execution/non-execution and timing of the change effect, the final display image of the active display, execution/non-execution and effect mode of the suggestive effect, etc. Depending on other effects and display states, the ratio of the effects mode can be changed and executed. In addition, depending on the effect mode of the promotion effect, the degree of expectation that the display result of the variable display will be "big hit" and controlled to the big win game state can be varied. Also, the suggestive effect, change effect, and cut-in effect can be executed without detecting the action of the player. Acceleration effects can be executed in a predetermined mode at different rates depending on whether or not execution of effects that can be executed without detecting the player's motion, the mode of performance, and the timing. As a result, by heightening the player's interest in various performances, the player's sense of expectation is appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and in order to solve at least one problem in the prior art, some of the features explained in the above embodiment It may be provided with the configuration of. For example, as in example 88AK01 of determination of the promotion effect related to the characteristic part 88AK and example 89AK01 of determination of the promotion effect related to the characteristic part 89AK, in a configuration in which the effect mode of the promotion effect can be determined regardless of whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect mode. , the cut-in effect may not be executed.

The promotion performance can be executed by changing the ratio of the performance mode according to the presence/absence of execution, the performance mode, the timing, or a combination of part or all of them in an arbitrary performance different from the promotion performance. For example, when the variable display effect of "pseudo-continuation" is executed, the rate at which the effect mode of the promotion effect becomes the predetermined mode may be varied according to whether or not it is executed, the effect mode, and the timing. In the “pseudo-continuous” variable display presentation, after the variable display is temporarily stopped after the variable display is started, the re-variable display can be executed once or more than once. When the variable display is temporarily stopped, a predetermined temporary stop mode, such as a pseudo consecutive chance, may be used. The pseudo-continuous chance eye may include a combination of a plurality of types of temporary stop symbols corresponding to the combination of decorative symbols. In this case, for example, the ratio of the effect mode of the promotion effect may be changed according to the pseudo-successful chances that are temporarily stopped and displayed.

When the "pseudo-continuous" variable display effect is executed, multiple promotion effects and action effects can be executed before and after the re-variable display, and after each re-variable display. may be In this case, among the multiple promotion effects, the second promotion effect that is executed after the first promotion effect is executed or not, the effect mode, the timing, or part or all of these in the first promotion effect. Depending on the combination, it may be possible to change the proportion of the effect mode and execute it.

Along with the change effect of changing the display mode of the active display, or instead of the change effect of changing the display mode of the active display, the suspension change effect of changing the display mode of the suspension display may be executed. In this case, pending information about the variable display is stored as pending data including a random value for display result determination, and the first pending display based on the pending information is stored in the first pending display area 87AKB1 and the second pending display area 87AKB2. or the second hold display is executed. Then, before starting the variable display corresponding to the reservation information, a reservation change effect is performed in which the display modes of the first reservation display and the second reservation display are changed at different rates depending on whether the reservation information is specific information. It may be executable. In such a configuration in which the pending change effect can be executed, the promotion effect may be executable by varying the proportion of the effect mode according to whether or not the pending change effect is executed, the effect mode, and the timing.

The production modes such as suggestive production, change production, cut-in production, and promotion production are not limited to those in which the production modes differ depending on the display of different display images for some or all of the production modes, and various production devices are used. It is also possible to have a different presentation mode. For example, together with the display of the display image, or instead of the display of the display image, the sound output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission mode of the light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and the performance LED, and the operation mode of the performance movable member Alternatively, an effect may be executed in one of a plurality of effect modes according to a combination of some or all of them.

The advantageous state is not limited to the jackpot game state, and may include a special game state such as a time saving state or a variable probability state. In addition, the upper limit number of round games that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the first round number (for example, "15") that is larger than the second round number (for example, "7"), and it is executable in the time saving state. The upper limit number of times of variable display is the first number (for example, "100") that is higher than the second number (for example, "50"), and the jackpot probability in the variable state is the second probability (for example, 1/50). 1 probability (for example, 1/20), and the number of consecutive chances, which is the number of times repeatedly controlled to the jackpot game state without being controlled to the normal state, is greater than the second consecutive chance number (for example, "5"). It may include a game situation that is more advantageous to the player, such as a part or all of the number of consecutive wins (for example, "10"). The display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4, which are the final display images of the active display, and the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for promotion effect may be determined at different ratios depending on whether or not they are controlled in an advantageous state. .

As an advantageous state advantageous to the player, it may be controlled to a KT (minor win time) state in which the variable display result has a high probability of becoming a "minor win". For example, after the jackpot gaming state is completed, it may be controlled to the KT state at a predetermined rate (including 100%). In addition, the gaming state that is not in the KT state may be referred to as a non-KT state. Also, the period during which the KT state is controlled may be referred to as the KT period, and the period during which the KT state is not controlled may be referred to as the non-KT period.

In the non-KT state, the variable display time of the second special figure is set to a very long time (for example, about 30 minutes). On the other hand, in the KT state, the variable display time of the second special figure is set to a relatively short time (for example, 5 seconds). For this reason, in the KT state, when the second start winning due to the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening occurs continuously, the execution frequency of the variable display using the second special figure is in the non-KT state It will be much better than when Corresponding to the variable display using the first special figure and the second special figure, the ratio of the variable display result determined to be a "small hit" is higher than the ratio of the variable display result determined to be a "big hit". ing. For example, the variable display result is determined to be a "small hit" at a rate of 99/100 (99%), and the variable display result is determined to be a "big hit" at a rate of 1/100 (1%). In addition, when the variable display result using the first special figure is "small hit", the period in which the large winning opening is opened is short, so it is difficult for the game ball to pass through (enter) the large winning opening. , and game balls that are substantially prize balls are not paid out. In the KT state, since the execution frequency of the variable display using the second special figure is improved, the frequency of the variable display result using the second special figure being "small hit" is also improved, and the small winning game state is established. It becomes easier to open the big prize mouth. In the KT state, the player shoots (right-handedly) a game ball toward the right game area, so that the frequency of opening the big winning opening is improved compared to the non-KT state, which is advantageous for the player. Become. The display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4 that are the final display images of the active display and the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 that are used for promotion effect may be determined at different ratios depending on whether or not the KT state is controlled.

Various restrictions may be based on arbitrary ranges and limits as long as they do not deviate from the objectives, problems to be solved, and other gist of the present invention. The range of restrictions may be any condition that makes the presence or absence, ratio, or other amount of processing, control, or execution of an action different. Any content that is different (for example, whether to stop or reduce, degree of reduction, etc.) may be used.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 87AK)
A game machine such as a pachinko game machine 1 that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player. , a specific display means capable of displaying specific displays corresponding to the variable display, such as the active display area 87AKA1, the first reserved display area 87AKB1, and the second reserved display area 87AKB2, and the player's Acceleration effect execution means such as effect control CPU 120 for executing step 87AKS051 of effect processing during variable display, for example, which can execute promotion effect to promote action, and action effect can be executed based on the detection result of detection means, For example, an action effect executing means such as the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS053 of the effect process during variable display, and an effect that can execute a predetermined effect during execution of variable display, such as step 87AKS049 of effect process during variable display A predetermined effect execution means such as the control CPU 120 is provided, and the specific display means includes a specific mode such as red display using the display image 87AKC4, for example, a plurality of displays such as display colors corresponding to the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4. The specific display can be displayed in any one of the modes, and the promotion effect execution means includes a special mode such as a large V-con display using the display image 87AKF3, for example, V-con display according to the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3. The promotion effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes such as the size of , and the predetermined effect execution means includes a predetermined mode such as a message of "Super heat !!" A predetermined effect can be executed in one of a plurality of effect modes such as messages corresponding to the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3. Depending on, a predetermined effect is executed in a predetermined manner at a different rate. The promotion effect is executed by a special mode, and controlled to an advantageous state at different ratios according to the effect mode of the promotion effect, for example, like the decision example 87AK51 of the promotion effect according to the variable display result in FIGS. 11-13. As a result, by increasing the player's interest in various presentations, the player's expectations can be appropriately heightened by the presentation, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B3), after the specific display is displayed by the specific display means and before the action effect is executed by the action effect execution means, the predetermined effect can be executed by the predetermined effect execution means. may As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, it may be possible to change the display mode of the specific display in response to execution of a predetermined effect such as the cut-in effect at the second timing in FIG. 11-9 (B3). As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, when one of the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3 is determined in the cut-in effect determination example 87AK41, the display mode of the specific display at a different rate depending on which of the plurality of effect modes the predetermined effect is executed. may be changed. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, when the first timing is determined to be the change pattern 87AKP1-3 in the determination example 87AK22 of the change pattern, it corresponds to the case where the display mode of the specific display is the specific mode before the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the display mode of the specific display. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the set value changing process of step S6A in FIG. Depending on the setting, the specific display may be displayed in one of multiple display modes at different ratios. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the set value changing process of step S6A in FIG. Depending on the setting, the predetermined effect may be executed in one of a plurality of effect modes at different ratios. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the set value changing process of step S6A in FIG. Like the determination example 87AK61 of the promotion effect in -16, the promotion effect may be executed in one of a plurality of effect modes at different ratios according to the setting of the setting means. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 88AK)
A game machine such as a pachinko game machine 1 that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player. , a specific display means capable of displaying specific displays corresponding to the variable display, such as the active display area 87AKA1, the first reserved display area 87AKB1, and the second reserved display area 87AKB2, and the player's Acceleration effect execution means such as effect control CPU 120 for executing step 87AKS051 of effect processing during variable display, for example, which can execute promotion effect to promote action, and action effect can be executed based on the detection result of detection means, For example, action effect execution means such as the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS053 of effect processing during variable display, and step 87AKS045 of effect processing during variable display that can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the specific display are executed. and a change effect execution means such as the effect control CPU 120, and the specific display means is, for example, a red color using the display image 87AKC4 from a certain period before the execution of the action effect, such as the effect execution examples 87AKM01 to 87AKM73. The specific display can be displayed in one of a plurality of display modes, such as display colors corresponding to the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4, including the specific mode of display, and the promotion effect execution means uses, for example, the display image 87AKF3. Including a special mode such as a large V-con display, for example, the promotion effect can be executed by any of a plurality of effect modes such as the size of the V-con display according to the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3, and the change effect execution means , For example, the change effect can be executed at any one of a plurality of timings, such as the timing at which the change effect can be executed in FIG. 11-9 (B3). As in the promotion effect determination example 88AK01, the promotion effect is executed in a special mode at different ratios according to the display mode of the specific display. In addition, when the promotion effect is executed in the special mode and when it is not executed in the special mode, the selection ratio of the timing at which the change effect is executed is different. As in decision example 88AK01, the advantageous state is controlled at different ratios according to the effect mode of the promotion effect. As a result, by increasing the player's interest in various presentations, the player's expectations can be appropriately heightened by the presentation, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B3), after the specific display is displayed by the specific display means and before the action effect is executed by the action effect execution means, the predetermined effect can be executed by the predetermined effect execution means. may As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, at the time of cut-in effect at the second timing in FIG. 11-9 (B3), the change effect execution means may be able to execute the change effect in response to the execution of the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect execution means. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, when one of the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3 is determined in the cut-in effect determination example 87AK41, the change effect can be executed at different rates depending on which of the plurality of effect modes the predetermined effect is executed. may be As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, when the first timing is determined to be the change pattern 87AKP1-3 in the determination example 87AK22 of the change pattern, it corresponds to the case where the display mode of the specific display is the specific mode before the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect. Therefore, it is not necessary to execute the change effect by the change effect execution means. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the set value changing process of step S6A in FIG. Depending on the setting, the specific display may be displayed in one of multiple display modes at different ratios. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the set value changing process of step S6A in FIG. Depending on the setting, the predetermined effect may be executed in one of a plurality of effect modes at different ratios. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the set value changing process of step S6A in FIG. Like the determination example 87AK61 of the promotion effect in -16, the promotion effect may be executed in one of a plurality of effect modes at different ratios according to the setting of the setting means. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 89AK)
A game machine such as a pachinko game machine 1 that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player. , a specific display means capable of displaying specific displays corresponding to the variable display, such as the active display area 87AKA1, the first reserved display area 87AKB1, and the second reserved display area 87AKB2, and the player's Acceleration effect execution means such as effect control CPU 120 for executing step 87AKS051 of effect processing during variable display, for example, which can execute promotion effect to promote action, and action effect can be executed based on the detection result of detection means, For example, an action effect executing means such as the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS053 of the effect process during variable display, and an effect process during variable display that can execute a suggestive effect that suggests that the display mode of the specific display will change. Suggestive effect execution means such as the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS043, and the specific display means includes a specific mode such as red display using the display image 87AKC4, for example, display according to the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4 The specific display can be displayed in any one of a plurality of display modes such as color, and the promotion effect execution means includes a special mode such as a large V-con display using the display image 87AKF3, for example, the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3. The promotion effect can be executed by any of a plurality of effect modes such as the size of the V-con display according to the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3. Suggestive effect can be executed by any one of them, for example, as in example 87 AK32 of suggestive effect determination in FIG. displayed, for example, as in example 89AK01 of determination of the promotion effect according to the suggestive effect shown in FIGS. Depending on whether or not, the suggestive effect is executed, and the advantageous state is controlled at different ratios according to the effect mode of the promoting effect, as in example 89AK01 of determining the promoting effect according to the result of the variable display in FIGS. 11-15. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B3), after the specific display is displayed by the specific display means and before the action effect is executed by the action effect execution means, the predetermined effect can be executed by the predetermined effect execution means. may As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, it may be possible to change the display mode of the specific display in response to the execution of the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect executing means, such as during the cut-in effect at the second timing in FIG. 11-9 (B3). As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, when one of the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3 is determined in the cut-in effect determination example 87AK41, the display mode of the specific display at a different rate depending on which of the plurality of effect modes the predetermined effect is executed. may be changed. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, when the first timing is determined to be the change pattern 87AKP1-3 in the determination example 87AK22 of the change pattern, it corresponds to the case where the display mode of the specific display is the specific mode before the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the display mode of the specific display. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the set value changing process of step S6A in FIG. Depending on the setting, the specific display may be displayed in one of multiple display modes at different ratios. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the set value changing process of step S6A in FIG. Depending on the setting, the predetermined effect may be executed in one of a plurality of effect modes at different ratios. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the set value changing process of step S6A in FIG. Like the determination example 87AK61 of the promotion effect in -16, the promotion effect may be executed in one of a plurality of effect modes at different ratios according to the setting of the setting means. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Pachinko game machine 5... Image display device 11... Main board 12... Effect control board 100... Game control microcomputer 120... Effect control CPU
91AK100 ... Production control microprocessor 91AK131 ... CPU
91AK132 … VDP
91AK143 ... Video decoder 91AK144 ... Video image renderer 91AK146 ... Text image renderer 91AKM01, 91AKM02, 91AKM11 to 91AKM14 ... Storage area

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
advance notice effect execution means capable of displaying multiple types of notice effect with different degrees of advantage;
a notification effect executing means capable of informing which of the advance notice effects has been selected;
an effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image to which a character image is added;
a first storage area for storing data related to moving images;
a second storage area for storing data relating to character images;
moving image control means for controlling display of a moving image using data in the first storage area;
character image control means for controlling the display of character images using the data in the second storage area;
the data in the second storage area includes data on a plurality of character image components including a first component and a second component;
The character image control means is
During the display period of the character image added to one moving image, the first component and the second component can be changed,
The first component and the second component related to the character image can be individually changed and displayed,
The effect executing means is capable of executing, as the specific effect, a first specific effect corresponding to the case of being controlled to the advantageous state and a second specific effect corresponding to the case not being controlled to the advantageous state,
The moving image control means is capable of controlling display of moving images using different data in the first storage area for the first specific effect and the second specific effect,
a character image data table composed of data relating to a plurality of character image constituent elements in the second storage area;
The character image data table that can be used when executing the first specific effect includes a first character image data table and a second character image data table different from the first character image data table,
The character image data table that can be used when executing the second specific effect includes the first character image data table and the second character image data table,
The degree of expectation that the advantageous state is controlled when the character image is displayed using the second character image data table, rather than when the character image is displayed using the first character image data table. is high,
The first character image data table includes first data for displaying the first character image using a first component made up of first character information and a second component made up of first display setting information; and second data for displaying the second character image using a first component configured by the second character information and a second component configured by the second display setting information,
The second character image data table displays the third character image using the first data, the first element composed of the third character information, and the second element composed of the third display setting information. a third data to
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images